DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

ENGINEERING

CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS

Under CBCS

(Applicable for Students admitted from Academic Year 2018-19)

B. Tech. Electronics and Communication Engineering

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SCHOOL OF ELECTRICAL SCIENCES

 B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

HINDUSTAN INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY & SCIENCE

VISION AND MISSION

MOTTO

“TO MAKE EVERY MAN A SUCCESS AND NO MAN A FAILURE.”

VISION
To be an International Institute of Excellence, providing a conducive environment
for education with a strong emphasis on innovation, quality, research and strategic
partnership blended with values and commitment to society.

MISSION
 To create an ecosystem for learning and world class research.
 To nurture a sense of creativity and innovation.
 To instill highest ethical standards and values with a sense of professionalism.
 To take up activities for the development of Society.
 To develop national and international collaboration and strategic partnership with
industry and institutes of excellence.
 To enable graduates to become future leaders and innovators.

VALUE STATEMENT
 Integrity, Innovation, Internationalization

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VISION AND MISSION

VISION

To offer holistic education in diverse spheres of Electronics and Communication

Engineering to transform students as job aspirants and entrepreneurs.

MISSION

 To impart knowledge to transform students into professional engineers.

 To develop their interdisciplinary skills as per the need of the society.
 To inculcate Entrepreneurship skills among the students.

1
 B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

B. Tech. Electronics and Communication Engineering

PROGRAMME EDUCATIONAL OBJECTIVES (PEO)

PEO I To provide students with a strong foundation in the Mathematical, Scientific and
Engineering fundamentals necessary to solve and analyze engineering problems and
to prepare them for higher learning and research.
PEO II To provide a platform for the students to acquire skills on cutting edge technologies
with adequate training & opportunities to work as teams on interdisciplinary projects.
PEO III To prepare the students to work with values & social concern, bridging the digital
divide and meeting the requirements of universal industry standards.
PEO IV To promote student awareness on life‐long learning and to introduce them to
professional ethics and codes of professional practice.

PROGRAM OUTCOMES (ALIGNED WITH GRADUATE ATTRIBUTES) (PO)

On completion of the programme, the students are able to:

PO 1: Able to apply knowledge of mathematics, science and engineering for modelling and
solving Electronics and Communication Engineering problems
PO 2: Able to identify, formulate and analyze complex Electronics and Communication
Engineering problems to reach logical conclusions
PO 3: Able to design a system to meet the desired specifications, performance and capabilities
compatible with health, safety, legal, societal and environmental considerations.
PO 4: Able to apply research based knowledge and methods for synthesis, analysis and
interpreting data to arrive at valid conclusions.
PO 5: Able to use modern engineering tools and techniques necessary for engineering design,
analysis and applications
PO 6: Able to apply contextual knowledge relevant to professional engineering practices.
PO 7: Able to understand the need for sustainable development and impact of professional
engineering solutions in societal and environmental context
PO 8: Able to apply ethical principles and commit to professional ethics, responsibilities and
norms of the Electronics and Communication Engineering practice.

2
 B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

PO 9: Able to collaborate and function as a team to accomplish a common goal through effective
learning.
PO 10: Able to communicate effectively in technical and non‐technical communications with a
range of audiences such as peer to peer and peer to group.
PO 11: Able to demonstrate knowledge and understanding of engineering finance and
management principles as member and leader in a team to manage multi‐disciplinary
projects.
PO 12: Able to engage in life‐long learning to follow developments in Electronics and
Communication Engineering.

PROGRAM SPECIFIC OUTCOMES (PSO)

PSO1: Apply the fundamental concepts of electronics and communication engineering to design a
variety of components and systems for applications including signal and image processing,
communication, networking, embedded systems, VLSI and control systems.
PSO2: Select and apply cutting‐edge engineering hardware and software tools to solve complex
Electronics and Communication Engineering problems.

3
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR

B. TECH. / B. TECH. (HONS.) DEGREE PROGRAMME

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Clause No. Contents Page Number

I Preamble 5
II Definitions and Nomenclatures 5
1. Vision, Mission and Objectives 7
2. Admission 8
3. Student Discipline 9
4. Structure of the B.Tech. Degree Programme 9
5. Faculty Advisor 12
6. Registration for courses in a Semester 13
7. B.Tech.(Hons) 14
8. B.Tech. with Minor Specialization 14
9. Attendance 15
10. Assessment Procedure 15
11. Procedures for Course Repetition / Repeat Examinations 20
12. Progression to higher semester 22
13. Maximum Duration 23
14. Temporary Withdrawal 23
15. Declaration of results 23
16. Grading 25
17. Grade Sheet 26
18. Class and Division 26
19. Transfer of credits 27
20. Eligibility for Award of the degree 27
21. Change of Discipline 28
22. Power to modify 28

4
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

I. PREAMBLE
As per the recommendations of UGC, the Hindustan Institute of Technology and Science
(HITS) has introduced Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) from the academic year 2015‐
16. Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) is a proven, flexible mode of learning in higher
education which facilitates a student to have guided freedom in selecting his/her own
choices of courses in the curriculum for completing a degree program. This revision of
regulations, curriculum and syllabi has been carried out further to make it more flexible
and adaptive to the technology advancements happening in the world. CBCS offers a
flexible system of learning.
The system permits a student to
(i) Learn at their own pace through flexible registration process
(ii) Choose electives from a wide range of courses offered within and outside their
departments
(iii) Undergo additional courses and acquire more than required number of credits
to obtain B. Tech (Hons)
(iv) Undergo additional courses in their special areas of interest and earn additional
credits to obtain B. Tech with Minor Specialization
(v) Adopt an interdisciplinary approach in learning
(vi) Avail transfer of Credits
(vii) Gain Non – CGPA credits to enhance skill/employability by taking up additional
project work, entrepreneurship, co‐curricular and vocational training.
(viii) Make the best use of the expertise of available faculty.
(ix) Learn and earn credits through MOOC and Project Based Learning
(x) Enhance their Knowledge, Skill and Attitude through participation in innovative
Curriculum Design, Delivery and Assessments.

The Curriculum is designed to take into the factors listed in the Choice Based Credit
System (CBCS) with focus on Project Based Learning and Industrial Training so as to
enable the students become eligible and fully equipped for employment in industries
choose higher studies or entrepreneurship.

II. DEFINITIONS AND NOMENCLATURE

In these Regulations, unless the context otherwise requires:
1. “Programme” means Degree Programme like B.Tech. Degree Programme.
2. “Discipline” means specialization or branch of B.Tech. Degree Programme, (e.g. Civil
Engineering).
3. “Course” means a theory or practical subject that is normally studied in a semester, (e.g.
Mathematics, Physics, etc.).

5
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

4. “Vice – Chancellor of HITS” means the Head of the Institution.

5. “Registrar” is the Head of all Academic and General Administration of the Institute.
6. “Dean Academics” means the authority of the University who is responsible for all
academic activities of various programmes and implementation of relevant rules of
these Regulations pertaining to the Academic Programmes.
7. “Controller of Examinations” means the authority of the University who is responsible
for all activities related to the University Examinations, publication of results, award of
grade sheets and degrees.
8. “Dean – Student Affairs” is responsible for all student related activities including
student discipline, extra and co – curricular activities, attendance and meetings with
class representatives, Student Council and parent – teacher meet.
9. “HoD” means the Head of the Department concerned.
10. “Institute” means Hindustan Institute of Technology and Science (HITS), Chennai.
11. “TCH” means Total Contact Hours – refers to the teaching – learning periods.
12. “DEC” means Department Exam Committee.
13. “BoS” means Board of Studies.
14. “BoM” means Board of Management.
15. “ACM” means Academic Council meeting the highest authoritative body for approval
for all Academic Policies.
16. “Class Teacher” is a faculty of the class who takes care of the attendance, academic
performance and the general conduct of the students of that class.
17. “CIA” is Continuous Internal Assessment which is assessed for every student for every
course during the semester.
18. “ESE” is End Semester Examination conducted by the Institute at the End of the
Semester for all the courses of that semester.
19. “AICTE” means All India Council for Technical Education.
20. “UGC” means University Grants Commission.
21. “MHRD” means Ministry of Human Resource Development, Govt. of India.

6
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS FOR B. Tech. / B.Tech. (Hons.)

Under Choice Based Credit System (CBCS)
(Effective from Academic year 2018 - 19)
1.0 Vision, Mission and Objectives
The Vision of the Institute is “To make every man a success and no man a failure”.
1.1The Mission of the institute is
 To create an ecosystem that promotes learning and world class research.

 To nurture creativity and innovation.

 To instil highest ethical standards and values.

 To pursue activities for the development of the Society.

 To develop national and international collaborations with institutes and industries of

eminence.

 To enable graduates to become future leaders and innovators.

Value Statement
Integrity, Innovation, Internationalization
1.2 Further, the Institute always strives
 To train our graduates with the latest and the best in the rapidly changing fields of
Architecture, Engineering, Technology, Management studies, Science and Humanities and
Liberal Arts.
 To develop graduates, with a global outlook, possessing Knowledge, Skills and Attitude and
capable of taking up challenging responsibilities in the respective fields.
 To mould our graduates as citizens with moral, ethical and social values so as to fulfil their
obligations to the nation and the society.
 To promote research in the field of Architecture, Engineering, Technology, Management
studies, Science and Humanities and Liberal Arts and Allied disciplines.

1.3 Aims and Objectives of the Institute are focused on

 Providing state of the art education in Engineering, Technology, Applied Sciences and
Management studies.
 Keeping pace with the ever – changing technological scenario and help the graduates to gain
proper direction to emerge as competent professionals fully aware of their commitment to
the society and the nation.
 To inculcate a flair for Research, Development and Entrepreneurship.

7
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

2.0 Admission
The admission policy and procedure shall be decided from time to time by the Board of
Management (BOM) of the Institute, based on the guidelines issued by the UGC/ Ministry of
Human Resource Development (MHRD), Government of India. The number of seats in each
of the B. Tech. degree programme will be decided by the Board of Management of the
Institute as per the directives of AICTE/ UGC / MHRD, Government of India, taking into
account, the market demands. Seats are also made available up to 20% of the sanctioned
intake for Non – Resident Indians and foreign nationals, who satisfy the admission eligibility
norms of the Institute.

2.1. Eligibility for Admission

(i) Regular Entry

Passed 10 + 2 examination with Physics and Mathematics as compulsory subjects along
with one of the other subjects as Chemistry/ Biotechnology/ Biology/ Technical
Vocational course.
The candidates should have obtained the minimum marks as per AICTE norms.

(ii) Lateral Entry

The candidates possessing a Diploma in Engineering/Technology in the relevant
discipline of specialization with minimum 50% marks awarded by the State Boards of
Technical Education, India or any other competent authority as accepted by the Board
of Management of the Institute as equivalent thereto are eligible for admission to the
3rd Semester of the B. Tech degree programme.
2.2 The candidate has to fulfil all the prescribed admission requirements / norms of
the Institute.
2.3. In all matters relating to admission to the B. Tech degree programme, the decision of
the Board of Management of the Institute shall be final.
2.4. At any time after admission, if found that a candidate has not fulfilled one or many of
the requirements stipulated by the Institute, or submitted forged certificates, the
Institute has the right to revoke the admission and forfeit the fee paid. In addition, legal
action may be taken against the candidate as decided by the Board of Management.

8
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

3.0 Student Discipline

Every student is required to observe utmost discipline and decorum both inside and
outside the campus and not to indulge in any activity which may affect adversely the
prestige reputation of the Institute.
3.1 Any act of indiscipline of a student reported to the Dean (Student affairs) and Head of the
Department will be referred to a Discipline Committee constituted for the purpose. The
Committee will enquire into the charges and decide on a suitable punishment if the charges
are substantiated. The committee will also authorize the Dean (Student Affairs) to
recommend to the Vice‐Chancellor for the implementation of the decision. The student
concerned may appeal to the Vice‐Chancellor, whose decision will be the final.
3.2 Ragging in any form is a criminal and non‐bailable offence in our country.
The current State and Central legislations provide stringent punishments including
imprisonment. Once the involvement of a student(s) is established in ragging, offending
fellow students/staff, harassment of any nature to the fellow students/staff etc. the
student(s) will be liable to be dismissed from the Institute, as per the laid down
procedures of the UGC / Govt. /Institute. Every senior student of the Institute, along
with their parent, shall give an undertaking every year in this regard and the same
should be submitted at the time of Registration.

4.0 Structure of the B. Tech Degree Programme

4.1 All B. Tech. degree Programmes will have the curriculum and syllabi (for 4 years) as
approved by the respective Board of Studies and Academic Council of the Institute.
4.2 Credits are the weightages, assigned to the courses based on the following general
pattern:
One Lecture / Tutorial period per week ‐‐‐ 1 credit
Up to Three periods of Practical per week ‐‐‐ 1 credit
4 periods of Practical per week ‐‐‐ 2 credits

4.3 The curriculum for B. Tech. programme is designed to have a minimum of 165 credits +
4 Non – CGPA credits that are distributed across eight semesters of study for the award
of degree.
Choice Based Credit System (CBCS) was introduced from the Academic year 2015‐16 in
the curriculum to provide the students, a balanced approach to their educational
endeavour.
Under CBCS, the degree programme will consist of the following categories of courses:
i) General Core foundation (CF) courses comprising of
9
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

 Humanities courses;
 Basic Sciences (BS)including Physics, Chemistry and Mathematics;
 Engineering Sciences (ES), including Basic Engineering courses such as Material
Science, Basic Workshop, Engineering Drawing, Engineering Graphics, Digital
systems, etc.

ii) Compulsory Courses (CC) consist of the following.

a. Professional Core (PC) courses: These courses expose the students to the
foundation of Engineering topics related to the chosen programme of study
comprising of theory and Practical/ field work/ Design project/ Project.

b. Departmental Elective (DE): These courses enable the students to take up a group
of courses of their interest in the area of specialization offered by the parent
Department / School.

iii) Non –Departmental Electives (NE): These courses are offered by Engineering and
Non‐Engineering departments (across the disciplines) other than their parent
Department. Two groups of Electives are available under NE namely, Engineering
Electives, offered by the Engineering Departments and Open Electives, offered by
the Non – Engineering departments.

iv) Indexed Journal / Conference Publications: If a student publishes a research paper

as main author in indexed Journal / Conference, the same can be considered as
equivalent to two – credit course under NE.

v) Non-CGPA courses: These courses are offered in certain semesters are compulsory,
but are not used for calculation of GPA and CGPA. However, the credits will be
mentioned in the grade sheet.

4.4 Non – CGPA courses

The student shall select any two courses /activity listed in Table 1 during the course of study.
The student has to make his / her own efforts for earning the credits. The grades given will be
Pass / Fail (P/F). The respective class teachers have to encourage, monitor and record the
relevant activities of the students, based on the rules issued from time to time by the Institute
and submit the End semester report to the Head of the Department.

10
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Table 1. Non – CGPA Courses

No. Course / Activity Credits
1. Start ups 2
2. Industrial Training 2
3. Technical conference, seminar, competitions, Professional 2
Societies
4. Management courses 2
5. Technical Certification Course 2
6. Sports 2
7. NCC 2
8. NSS 2
9. YRC 2
10. Art and Cultural activities 2
11. English Proficiency Certification 2
12. Aptitude Proficiency Certification 2
13. Foreign Languages Level II and above 2
14. Publication in Conferences / Seminar 2

4.5 A student must earn compulsorily, the credits mentioned under each category shown
in Table 2 and also a minimum total of 169 credits - 165 credits (CGPA) + 4 credits (Non
CGPA) for the award of B. Tech. degree. For Lateral entry students, the 41 credits
required for first and second semester of B. Tech shall be deemed to have been earned
based on their curriculum in the diploma course. They have to earn a minimum of 128
credits (124 credits + 4 Non CGPA credits) for the award of B. Tech. degree.
4.6 Students are eligible for award of B.Tech.(Hons) upon successful completion of 181
credits (165 regular credits + 12 Additional Credits+ 4 Non CGPA credits) maintaining
a CGPA of 8.0 during their period of study (4 years) and no history of arrears as detailed
in clause 7.0.
4.7 Students are eligible for the award of B.Tech. with Minor specialisation upon successful
completion of 12 additional credits totalling 181 credits (165 regular credits + 12
Additional Credits+ 4 Non – CGPA credits) as detailed in clause 8.0

11
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Table 2. Distribution of Credits

No. Category Credits Percentage
1 Basic Sciences (BS) 32 20
2 Humanities Courses (HS) 7 4
3 Professional Core (PC) 90 53
4 Department Elective (DE) 15 9
5 Non – Department Electives (NE) 10 6
6 Design Project 3 2
7 Internship 1 0.5
8 Project 8 5
9 Comprehension 1 0.5
Total Credits 165 100
NON – CGPA
10 Professional Development 4 ‐‐‐

4.8 The medium of instruction is English for all courses, examinations, seminar
presentations and project reports.

5.0 Faculty Advisor

To help the students in planning their selection of courses and programme of study and
for getting general advice on the academic programme, the concerned department will
assign a certain number of students to a Faculty member who will be called their Faculty
Advisor. Such Faculty Advisor will continue to mentor the students assigned to him/her
for the entire duration of the programme.

5.1Class Committee

5.2 Every section / batch of the B. Tech. Degree programme will have a Class Committee
consisting of Faculty and students.
5.3 The constitution of the Class Committee will be as follows:
a. One Professor not associated with teaching the particular class shall be nominated by
the Head of the Department to act as the Chairman of the Class Committee as approved
by the Dean Academics.
b. Course coordinator of each of the lecture – based courses (for common courses).
c. Class teacher of the class.
d. All Faculty handling the courses for that class in the semester.

12
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

e. Workshop Superintendent (for first two semesters); as applicable.

f. Four students from the respective class nominated by Head of the Department
g. Faculty Advisors of the respective class.

5.4 Course committee

A course committee shall be constituted by the HOD for all the common courses, with
the faculty who are teaching the courses and with a Professor of the core department
as the Chairman. The Course committee shall meet periodically to ensure the quality of
progression of the course in the semester.
5.5 The basic responsibilities of the Class Committee and Course committee are
a. To review periodically the progress of the students.
b. To discuss issues concerning curriculum and syllabi and the conduct of the classes.
c. To inform the students about the method of assessment as recommended by the
Department Exam Committee (“DEC”) at the beginning of the semester. Each class
committee / course committee will communicate its recommendations and the minutes
of the meetings to the Head of the Department, Dean (Academics) and the Dean
(Student Affairs).
d. To conduct meetings at least thrice in a semester as per the Academic Plan issued by
the Dean – Academics.
e. To review the academic performance of the students including attendance, internal
assessment and other issues like discipline, maintenance etc.

6.0 Registration for courses in a Semester

A student will be eligible for registration of courses only if he/she satisfies the regulation
clause 12.0 (progression), and clause 13.0 (maximum duration) and has cleared all dues
to the Institute, Hostel and Library up to the end of the previous semester provided that
student is not debarred from enrolment on disciplinary grounds.

6.1 The institute follows a flexible Choice Based Credit System and Slot based table.
Accordingly, the students shall be given the option for selecting their courses, credits,
teachers, slots and create their time table. The student is given the option of selecting
the number of credits to undergo in a semester, subject to the curriculum
requirements of minimum and maximum.

Except for the first year courses, registration for a semester will be done during a
specified week before the start of the semester as per the Academic Schedule.

13
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Late registration /enrolment will be permitted by the Dean – Academics for genuine
cases, on recommendation by the Head of the respective department, with a late fee
as decided from time to time.

6.2 The student shall make the choice of course in consultation with the Faculty Advisor and
as stipulated from time to time.

6.3 Students shall have to pay additional fee as prescribed, for registering in certain elective
courses under Non ‐ Departmental Electives courses offered by certain specific
Departments and for higher level Foreign Languages, as decided from time to time.

7.0 B. Tech, (Honours) Programme

A new academic programme B.Tech. (Hons.) is introduced in order to facilitate the
students to choose additionally the specialized courses of their choice and build
their competence in a specialized area. The features of the new programme, include:
a. B.Tech. students in regular stream can opt for B.Tech. (Hons.), provided they have a
CGPA of 8.0 up to the end of fourth semester without any history of arrears.
b. The students opting for this program have to take four additional courses of their
specialization of a minimum of 3 credits each from 5th to 8th semesters with not more
than 2 additional courses in a semester.
c. The list of such additional courses offered by the various Departments of the respective
school will be announced in the beginning of the academic year to facilitate the
registration process.
d. The student can also opt for post graduate level courses
e. The faculty advisor will suggest the additional courses to be taken by the students based
on their choice and level of their academic competence.
f. Students who have obtained “E” or “U” or “RC” / “RA” grade or “DE” category (vide
clause 16.0 – Grading) in any course, including the additional credit courses, are not
eligible for B.Tech. (Hons) degree.
g. The students have to pay the requisite fee for the additional courses.

8.0 B. Tech with Minor specialization:

Students, who are desirous of pursuing their special interest areas other than the chosen
discipline of Engineering / Technology/ Arts/ Fashion/ Humanities/ Management/ Basic
Sciences, may opt for additional courses in minor specialisation groups offered by a
department other than their parent department. Such students shall select the stream of
courses offered with pre – requisites by the respective departments and earn a Minor
Specialization.

14
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

a. The number of credits to be earned for Minor specialization is 12 credits.

b. The students are permitted to register for their minor specialization courses from the
V semester onwards subject to a maximum of two additional courses per semester.
c. The list of such additional courses offered by the various departments and the schedule
will be announced in the beginning of the academic year to facilitate the registration
process.
d. The students have to pay the requisite fee for the additional courses.

9.0 Attendance
The faculty handling a course must finalise the attendance, 3 calendar days before the
last instructional day of the course and submit to the HoD through the class teacher.

a. A student with less than 75% attendance (Total Contact Hours ‐ “TCH”) in any course,
will not be permitted to appear for the end‐semester examination in that particular
course, irrespective of the reason for the shortfall of the attendance. The student is
however permitted to avail Academic Leave up to 10% for attending academic related
activities like, Industrial Visits, Seminars, Conferences, Competitions etc., with the prior
approval of the HoD. After the event, the student should submit the relevant documents
for proof to the HoD for approval of the Academic Leave.
b. The remaining 25% allowance in attendance is given to account for activities under NCC
/ NSS / Cultural / Sports/ Minor Medical exigencies etc.
c. A student with an attendance (“TCH” – Total Contact Hours) between 40% and 75% in
any course will fall under the category “RC”, which means Repeat the Course during the
Summer / Winter break. Students under “RC” category will not be permitted to attend
the Regular End Semester Examinations for that course. During the Summer / Winter
break, the regular courses of the respective semester will be offered as Summer/Winter
Courses, to enable the students to get required attendance and internal assessment
marks to appear in the Repeat examination.
d. Students under “RC” category in any course shall attend, the immediately following
Summer / Winter course as detailed in clause 11.1. The detailed schedule of the
Summer / Winter courses offered in every semester will be announced during the end
of that semester. The student who have obtained “RC” has to select their appropriate
slots and courses, optimally to attend the courses.
e. The student, whose attendance falls below 40% for a course in any semester, will be
categorized as “RA”, meaning detained in the particular course for want of attendance
and they will not be permitted to write the End semester exam for that course. The
procedure for repeating the course categorized as “RA” is mentioned in Clause 11.2.

15
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

9.1 Additional condonation may be considered in rare and genuine cases which includes,
approved leave for attending select NCC / Sports Camps, cases requiring prolonged
medical treatment and critical illness involving hospitalization.

For such select NCC / Sports Camps prior permission for leave shall be obtained by the
respective faculty coordinator / Director of sports from the designated authority, before
deputing the students.

9.2 For medical cases, submission of complete medical history and records with prior
information from the parent / guardian to Dean (Student Affairs) is mandatory. The
assessment of such cases will be done by the attendance sub – committee on the merit
of the case and put up recommendations to the Vice – Chancellor. Such condonation is
permitted only twice for a student in the entire duration of the programme.
The Vice‐Chancellor, based on the recommendation of the attendance sub ‐ committee
may then give condonation of attendance, only if the Vice‐Chancellor deems it fit and
deserving. But in any case, the condonation cannot exceed 10%.

10.0 Assessment Procedure

Every course shall have two components of assessment namely,
a. Continuous Internal Assessment “CIA”: This assessment will be carried out throughout the
semester as per the Academic Schedule.
b. End Semester Examination “ESE”: This assessment will be carried out at the end of the
Semester as per the Academic Schedule.

The weightages for the various categories of the courses for CIA and ESE is given in Table 3.

16
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Table 3 Weightage of the CIA and ESE for various categories of the courses
Passing
CIA CIA ESE
No. Category of Courses ESE minimum
weightage Minimum Minimum
(CIA + ESE)
1 Theory Course 50% 40% 50% 50% 45%
2 Practical Course 80% 50% 20% 50% 50%
3 Theory Course with 60% 40% 40% 50% 45%
Practical Components
4 Department Elective 50% 40% 50% 50% 45%
(DE)/ Non –
Department Elective
(NE)
5 Design Project 100% 50% ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ 50%
6 Comprehension 100% 50% ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ 50%
7 Internship 100% 50% ‐‐‐ ‐‐‐ 50%
8 Project and Viva Voce 50% 50% 50% 50% 50%

10.1 Theory Course / DE / NE Assessment weightages

The general guidelines for the assessment of Theory Courses, Department Electives “DE”
and Non – Department Electives “NE” shall be done on a continuous basis is given in Table
4.
Table 4(a): Weightage for Assessment
No. Assessment Weightage Duration
Theory, DE, NE courses Theory, DE, NE
courses
1. First Periodical Assessment 5% 1 period
2. Second Periodical Assessment 10% 1 Period
3. CIA Third Periodical Assessment 10% 1Period
4. Seminar/Assignments/Project 15% ‐‐
5. Surprise Test / Quiz etc., 10% ‐‐
6. ESE End Semester Exam 50% 2 to 3 hours

17
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

10.2 Practical Course: For practical courses, the assessment will be done by the course teachers
as below:
Weekly assignment/Observation / lab records and viva as approved by the Department
Exam Committee “DEC”
a. Continuous Internal Assessment ‐‐80%
b. End Semester Examination ‐‐20%

10.3 Theory courses with practical Component: For theory courses with practical
component the assessment will be calculated as follows as approved by the “DEC”.
a. Continuous Internal Assessment ‐‐ 60%
b. End Semester Exam ‐‐ 40%

Table 4(b): Weightage for Assessment

Assessment Weightage
No. Theory, DE, NE courses Theory, DE, NE Duration
courses
1. First Periodical Assessment 10% 1 period
2. Second Periodical Assessment 10% 1 Period
3. CIA Third Periodical Assessment 10% 1Period
4. Practical Assessment 30% ‐‐‐‐
5. ESE End Semester Exam 40% 2 to 3 hours

10.4 Design Project – Assessment

The general guidelines for assessment of Design Project is given in Table 5.
Table 5: Assessment pattern for Design Project
No. Review / Examination scheme Broad Guidelines Weightage
1. First Review Concept 20%
2. Second Review Design 30%
3. Third Review Experiment/Analysis 20%
4. Project report Results and Conclusion 30%
and Viva – Voce

10.5 Comprehension – Assessment

The general guidelines for assessment of Comprehension is given in Table 6.

18
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Table 6: Assessment pattern for Comprehension

No. Review / Examination scheme Broad Guidelines Weightage
1. First Periodical Assessment – MCQ Basic Sciences 20%
2. Second Periodical Assessment – Core Engineering 50%
MCQ
3. Third Periodical Assessment – Emerging Areas 30%
Presentation
10.6 Internship
A student has to compulsorily attend Summer / Winter internship during 3rd year for a
minimum period of one month.
In lieu of Summer / Winter internship, the student is permitted to register for
undertaking case study / project work under an engineering faculty of the Institute and
carry out the project for minimum period of one month.
In both the cases, the internship report in the prescribed format duly certified by the
faculty in‐charge shall be submitted to the HoD. The evaluation will be done through
presentation and viva. The course will have a weightage of one credit or as defined in
the respective curriculum.
10.7 For final year Project / Dissertation / Design Project/ Internship, the assessment will be
done on a continuous basis as given in Table 7
Table 7: Assessment of Project work
No. Review / Examination scheme Weightage
1. First Review 10%
2. Second Review 20%
3. Third Review 20%
4. Project report and Viva – Voce 50%

For the final year project and Viva – Voce end semester examination, the student shall submit
a Project Report in the prescribed format issued by the Institute. The first three reviews will be
conducted by a Committee constituted by the Head of the Department. The end – semester
assessment will be based on the project report and a viva on the project conducted by a
Committee constituted by the Registrar / Controller of examination. This may include an external
expert.
10.8 For Non – CGPA courses, the assessment will be graded “Satisfactory/Not Satisfactory” and
grades as Pass/Fail will be awarded.
10.9 Flexibility in Assessment
The respective Departments under the approval of the Department Exam Committee
(DEC) may decide the mode of assessment, based on the course requirements.

19
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

10.10 A student securing less than the minimum specified internal assessment marks in any
course (clause 10.0, Table 3), will not be permitted to appear for the end‐semester
examination in that particular course and will be graded under “RC” category for that
course. This will be denoted in the grade sheet as “RC”, till the course is
successfully completed in the subsequent semester(s).

11.0 Procedures for Course Repetition / Repeat Examinations

11.1 Summer / Winter Course: - for “RC” Category
a. Students under RC category i.e.
i. Attendance between 40% and 75% in any course(s) OR
ii. CIA marks less than the prescribed minimum as specified in 10.0 Table 3 in
any course(s) OR
iii. Falls under both 1 and 2 above
are eligible for registering for the Summer / Winter Course which will be conducted
during the Summer / Winter break, to improve their Attendance and/or CIA marks in
the courses, by paying the prescribed registration fee fixed from time to time..

b. The Odd semester regular courses will be offered only in the Winter and the even
semester regular courses will be offered only in the Summer.
c. RC students shall register by payment of prescribed fee and attend the classes during
the summer / winter break and take assessments to earn minimum internal marks
(clause 10.0, Table 3) and/or required attendance, to become eligible for writing the
Repeat Examinations (Clause 11.3).
d. The revised CIA marks shall not exceed 60% of the total internal weightage for any
repeat course.
e. Re- Registration for ‘RC’ category

The students under “RC” category who fail to improve their attendance and/or CIA
marks and not become eligible to write the Repeat Examination through the
immediate summer/winter course are permitted to re – register for the Summer /
Winter course again under “RC” category whenever it is offered in the subsequent
semester(s) during their period of study by paying 50% of the prescribed registration
fee as mentioned in Clause 11.1 (a). It is the responsibility of the student to fix the
appropriate slots in the Summer / Winter course time table. The student will not be
able to register if he/she is unable to fix the slots in the time table. The course will
remain in the “RC” category until he / she successfully completes that course.
11.2 Course – Repetition - “RA” Category

20
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

a. Students who secure attendance less than 40% in any course(s) in a semester will be
categorized under “RA” ‐ meaning Repeat the course(s) for want of minimum
attendance. The CIA marks obtained by the students placed under RA category will
become null and void.
b. “RA” category students shall re‐register for the same course once again whenever it
is offered in the subsequent regular semesters and has to secure required minimum
attendance and minimum internal assessment marks to become eligible to appear
in the end semester examination for that course, by paying the requisite fee.
c. It is the responsibility of the student to schedule their time table to include the “RA”
courses without affecting the attendance of the regular courses of the current
semester.
d. Normally, a student will be permitted to register for not more than 3 “RA” courses
in a semester. However, the students who wish to register for more than 3 “RA”
courses are permitted to register only if the student finds suitable slots for doing the
course within the framework of the time table for the regular semester. Request for
registrations of additional RA courses over and above 3 in a semester shall be got
approved by the respective HoDs.
e. The student has the option to drop their regular courses proportionally in their
regular semester during the course registration process without affecting the
minimum credit requirement specified. Such dropped courses will be categorized as
“RA”. However, the student has to complete the dropped courses in the subsequent
semesters.
f. It is the responsibility of the student to fix the slots for “RA” courses within the
framework of the time table and slot availability without affecting his/her regular
courses.
g. Detention
A student who secure RC or RA or both in all the theory courses prescribed in a
semester shall repeat the semester by registering for the semester in the next
academic year. However, he/she is permitted to appear for arrear examination as
per eligibility.
11.3Repeat Examinations
a. Normally, the results of the End Semester Examinations for Regular Theory courses are
announced within a period of 10 days after the last regular examination.
b. During the even semester, the Repeat Examinations will be conducted for even
semester courses and during the Odd semester the Repeat Examinations will be
conducted for Odd semester courses.
c. The schedule for the Repeat Examinations will be notified through the Academic
Calendar which will be published at the beginning of every academic year.
21
 ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

d. The students under “RC” category, who have secured the requisite attendance and
internal assessment marks as applicable, by successfully completing the Summer /
Winter course, are eligible to register for the Repeat Examinations.
e. The students who fail to secure a pass or being absent for genuine reasons in their End
Semester Examination for the regular courses are permitted to appear for the Repeat
Exams by paying the prescribed fee.
f. For the Supplementary examinations (refer: Clause 15.2), the students with “U” grade
in any course (refer clause 10.0 Table 3 and Clause 16.1) shall register by paying
requisite fee and appear in the Repeat Examinations.
g. The students who wish to apply for the revaluation of their answer scripts (Regular/
Supplementary / Repeat Examinations) should apply immediately after the
announcement of results.

12.0 Progression to higher semester

12.1 B.Tech.– Regular: Student has to satisfy the following conditions as laid down in Table
8 for progression from one academic year to next.
Table 8. Minimum Eligibility for progression B.Tech.- Regular
To enroll for semester Minimum no. of credits to be earned for progression
3 NIL
st nd rd
5 15 credits* in Theory courses in 1 , 2 and 3
Semesters
th
7 30 credits* in Theory courses up to 5 Semester
* Credit calculation is applicable for Theory / Theory integrated lab only
If a student fails to satisfy the above clause 12.1 in an academic year, the student has
to take a break in study until they become eligible for progression

12.2 B.Tech.- Lateral Entry

Student has to satisfy the following conditions as laid down in Table 9 for progression
from one academic year to next.
Table 9. Minimum Eligibility for progression B.Tech.- Lateral Entry

To enroll for semester Minimum no. of credits to be earned

5 NIL
15 credits* in Theory courses in 3rd, 4th
7
and 5th Semesters
*Credit calculation is applicable for Theory / Theory integrated lab only

22
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

If a student fails to satisfy the above clause 12.2 in an academic year, the student has to take
a break in study until they become eligible for progression

12.3 If a student is in RC category (due to lack of minimum CIA marks as specified in clause
no. 10. Table 3) or RA category (due to lack of minimum attendance as specified in
clause 9.0 e) in all theory courses prescribed in a semester, he/she will be detained and
will not be allowed to proceed to the next semester. He/she has to re‐register for all the
courses in the following academic year only.

13.0 Maximum Duration of the Programme

A student may complete the programme at a slower pace than the regular
pace, but in any case in not more than 6 years for B. Tech, and not more than 5 years
for lateral entry students excluding the semesters withdrawn as per clause 14.0.
A student completing the B.Tech. programme during the extended period will not be
eligible for Institute ranking.

14.0 Temporary Withdrawal from the Programme

a. A student is permitted to take a break, up to a maximum of 2 semesters, during the entire
programme to clear the backlog of arrears.
b. A student may be permitted by the Vice‐ Chancellor to withdraw from the entire
programme for a maximum of two semesters for reasons of ill health, Start – up
venture or other valid reasons as recommended by a committee consisting of Head of
Department, Dean (Academic) and Dean (Student Affairs).

15.0 Declaration of results

15.1 A student shall secure the minimum marks as prescribed in Clause 10.1(Table 3) in all
categories of courses in all the semesters to secure a pass in that course.
15.2 Supplementary Examinations: If a candidate fails to secure a pass in a course and gets
a “U” grade as per clause 16.1 he/she shall register and pay the requisite fee for re‐
appearing in the End Semester Examination during the following semester(s). Such
examinations are called Supplementary Examinations and will be conducted along with
the Regular /Repeat Examinations. The Supplementary Exams for the Odd semester
courses will be conducted during the odd semester and supplementary exams for the
even semester courses will be conducted during the even semester only. The student
need not attend any contact course. The Internal Assessment marks secured by the
candidate will be retained for all such attempts.

23
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

15.3 A candidate can apply for the revaluation of his/her end semester examination answer
script in a theory course, after the declaration of the results, on payment of a prescribed
fee.
15.4 If a candidate fails to secure a pass in Practical/Theory with Practical component / Design
Project / Internship / Comprehension courses, due to not satisfying the minimum passing
requirement (“U” grade) – as per clause 16.1 he/she shall register for the courses by
paying the prescribed fee in the subsequent semester when offered by the
departments.
15.5 Revaluation is not permitted for Practical/Theory with Practical component/Design
Project / Internship / Comprehension courses. However, only for genuine grievances as
decided by the Exam Grievance Committee a student may be permitted to apply for
revaluation.
15.6 After 5 years, i.e., completion of one year (2 semesters) from the normal duration of
the programme, the internal assessment marks obtained by the candidate will not be
considered in calculating the passing requirement. A candidate who secures 50% in the
end semester examination will be declared to have passed the course and earned the
specified credits for the course irrespective of the score in internal assessment marks
earned in that course.
15.7 Candidate who earns required credits for the award of degree after 5 years for B.Tech.
programme (on expiry of extended period of 2 semesters over and above normal duration
of course) he/she will be awarded only second class irrespective of his/her CGPA. However,
the period approved under temporary withdrawal, if any, from the programme (13.0) will be
excluded from the maximum duration as mentioned above.

15.8 Semester Abroad Programme: Students who are allowed to undergo internship or Training in
Industries in India or abroad during their course work or attend any National / International
Institute under semester abroad programme (SAP) up to a maximum of 2 semesters will be
granted credit transfer for the Course Work/project work done by them in the Industry /Foreign
Institute as per the recommendations of the credit transfer committee. The leave period of the
students for International internships / Semester Abroad programme etc., will be accounted
for attendance.

24
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

16.0 Grading

16.1 A grading system as shown in Table 10 will be followed.

Table 10: Grading system

Range of Letter Grade
Remarks
Marks Grade Points
90 – 100 S 10 Outstanding

80‐89 A 09 Excellent

70‐79 B 08 Very Good

60‐69 C 07 Good

50‐59 D 06 Average

45 – 49 E 05 Pass

<45 U 00 To Reappear for end‐semester examination

Repeat Course (Summer / Winter) due to

Attendance deficiency ( between 40% and
75%)
‐‐ RC 00
and/or
I. Lack of minimum CIA marks as specified in
clause 10.0 Table 3
‐‐ RA 00 Repeat the course due to
(i) Lack of minimum attendance (below 40%) in
regular course
‐‐ 00 DETAINED
“RC” or “RA” or both in all registered theory
courses of a semester. The student is detained
and has to repeat the entire semester. Clause
12.3

16.2 GPA and CGPA

GPA is the ratio of the sum of the product of the number of credits Ci of course “i “and
the grade points Pi earned for that course taken over all courses “i” registered and
successfully completed by the student to the sum of Ci for all “i”. That is,

25
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

 C i Pi
GPA  i
 Ci
i
CGPA will be calculated in a similar manner, in any semester, considering all the courses
enrolled from the first semester onwards.
16.3 The Grade card will not include the computation of GPA and CGPA for courses with letter
grade RA, RC and U until those grades are converted to the regular grades.
16.4 A course successfully completed cannot be repeated.

17.0 Grade Sheet

17.1 Letter grade
Based on the performance, each student is awarded a final letter grade at the end of
the semester in each course. The letter grades and corresponding grade points are given
in Table 10.
17.2 A student is considered to have completed a course successfully and earned credits if he/she
secures a letter grade other than U, RC, RA in that course.
17.3 After results are declared, grade sheet will be issued to each student which will contain the
following details:
a. Program and discipline for which the student has enrolled.
b. Semester of registration.
c. The course code, name of the course, category of course and the credits for each course
registered in that semester
d. The letter grade obtained in each course
e. Semester Grade Point Average (GPA)
f. The total number of credits earned by the student up to the end of that semester in each
of the course categories.
g. The Cumulative Grade Point Average (CGPA) of all the courses taken from the first
semester.
h. Credits earned under Non CGPA courses.
i. Additional credits earned for B. Tech (Hons.) and B. Tech with Minor specialization.

18.0 Class/Division

18.1Classification is based on CGPA and is as follows:

CGPA ≥ 8.0: First Class with distinction
6.5 ≤ CGPA <8.0: First Class
5.0 ≤ CGPA <6.5: Second Class.
26
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

18.2 (i) Further, the award of ‘First class with distinction’ is subject to the candidate
becoming eligible for the award of the degree having passed the examination in all
the courses in his/her first appearance with effect from II semester, within the
minimum duration of the programme.
(ii) The award of ‘First Class’ is further subject to the candidate becoming eligible for the
award of the degree having passed the examination in all the courses within 5 years
for B. Tech programmes
(iii) The period of authorized break of the programme (vide clause 14.0) will not be
counted for the purpose of the above classification.
(iv) To be eligible for award of B. Tech (Hons.) the student must have earned additional
12 credits in the relevant Engineering courses offered by the Departments of the
respective Schools, thereby a total of 181 credits (165 regular credits + 12 additional
credits + 4 Non CGPA credits) and should have 8.0 CGPA without any history of
arrears and should not have secured E, RC, RA, U, in any course during the entire
programme.
(v) To be eligible for award of B. Tech with Minor Specialization, the student must have
earned additional 12 credits in the relevant courses offered by other than the parent
department and has successfully earned 181 credits (165 regular credits + 12
Additional credits + 4 Non CGPA Credits)

19.0 Transfer of credits

19.1. Within the broad framework of these regulations, the Academic Council, based on the
recommendation of the Credit Transfer Committee so constituted may permit students to
transfer part of the credit earned in other approved Universities of repute & status in the
India or abroad.
19.2 The Academic Council may also approve admission of students who have completed a
portion of course work in another approved Institute of repute under lateral entry based on
the recommendation of the credit transfer committee on a case to case basis.
19.3 Admission norms for working Professional:
Separate admission guidelines are available for working / experienced professionals for
candidates with the industrial / research experience who desire to upgrade their qualification
as per recommendation of Credit Transfer Committee.
20.0 Eligibility for Award of the B.Tech. /B. Tech (Hons)/ B. Tech with Minor Specialization
Degree
20.1 A student shall be declared to be eligible for award of B. Tech. /B. Tech (Hons) / B. Tech
degree with Minor specialization if he/she has satisfied the clauses 4.6 /7.0 / 8.0
respectively within the stipulated time (clause 13, 14).
27
ACADEMIC REGULATIONS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

a. Earned the specified credits in all the categories of courses (vide clause 4.6) as specified
in the curriculum corresponding to the discipline of his/ her study ;
b. No dues to the Institute, Hostels, Libraries etc.; and
c. No disciplinary action is pending against him / her.

The award of the degree shall be recommended by the Academic Council and approved by the
Board of Management of the Institute.

21.0 Change of Discipline

21.1 If the number of students in any discipline of B.Tech. programme as on the last instructional
day of the First Semester is less than the sanctioned strength, then the vacancies in the said
disciplines can be filled by transferring students from other disciplines subject to eligibility.
All such transfers will be allowed on the basis of merit of the students. The decision of the
Vice‐Chancellor shall be final while considering such requests.
21.2 All students who have successfully completed the first semester of the course will be eligible
for consideration for change of discipline subject to the availability of vacancies and as per
norms.

22.0Power to modify
Notwithstanding all that has been stated above, the Academic Council is vested with powers
to modify any or all of the above regulations from time to time, if required, subject to the
approval by the Board of Management.

28
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND CO MMUNICATION ENGINEERING

(165 CREDIT STRUCTURE)
SEMESTER - I
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
MEA4101/ Engineering Graphics And Computer
1 BS Aided Design / Professional English 1 1 2 3 2 4
ELA4101
and Soft Skills
2 BS MAA4101 Matrices and Calculus 3 0 2 4 1 5
PHA4102/ Engineering Physics / Engineering
3 BS 3 0 0 3 1 3
CYA4101 Materials
4 PC CSA4101 Problem Solving Using C 2 0 2 3 1 4
5 PC EEB4101 Introduction to Digital Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 BS GEA4131 Engineering Immersion Lab 0 0 2 2 2
PHA4131/ Engineering Physics Lab / Materials
7 BS 0 0 2 1 0 2
CYA4131 Chemistry Lab
Total 12 1 10 17 8 23
SEMESTER - II
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4117 Analytical Mathematics 3 0 2 4 0 5
PHA4102/ Engineering Physics / Engineering
2 BS 3 0 0 3 1 3
CYA4101 Materials
Engineering Graphics And Computer
MEA4101/
3 BS Aided Design / Professional English 1 1 2 3 1 4
ELA4101
and Soft skills
4 PC ECB4101 Engineering and Design 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 PC ECB4116 Digital System Design 3 1 0 4 0 4
6 PC ECB4117 Network Theory 3 1 0 4 0 4
7 PC GEA4102 Sustainable Engineering Systems 2 0 0 2 1 2
8 PC ECB4141 Digital System Design Lab 0 0 2 1 0 2
9 BS GEA4131 Engineering Immersion Lab 0 0 2 1 2 2
PHA4131/ Engineering Physics Lab/ Materials
10 BS 0 0 2 1 0 2
CYA4131 Chemistry Lab
Total 18 3 10 26 6 31

29
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER - III
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
Partial Differential Equations and
1 BS MAA4201 3 1 0 4 0 4
Transforms
2 PC ECB4201 Analog Electronics 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4202 Electromagnetic Fields and Waves 3 1 0 4 2 4
4 BS GEA4216 Professional Ethics and Life Skills 2 0 0 2 1 2
5 DE Department Elective‐I 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE Non Department Elective‐ I 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4231 Analog Electronics Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC ECB4232 Circuits Simulation Lab 0 0 2 1 0 2
9 PC ECB4233 Design Project ‐ I 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 16 3 7 22 7 26

SEMESTER - IV
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4218 Random Process 3 1 0 4 0 4
2 PC ECB4216 Transmission Lines and Networks 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4217 Signals and Systems 3 1 0 4 1 4
Microcontrollers and Embedded
4 PC ECB4218 3 0 0 3 1 3
Systems
5 DE Department Elective‐II 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE Non Department Elective–II 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4241 MATLAB and Simulink Lab 0 0 2 1 0 2
Microcontrollers and Embedded
8 PC ECB4242 0 0 3 1 0 3
Systems Lab
9 PC ECB4243 Design Project ‐ II 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 17 3 7 23 6 27

30
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER - V
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 BS MAA4301 Optimization Techniques 3 1 0 4 0 4
2 PC ECB4301 Control Systems 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4302 Communication Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 PC ECB4303 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 4 1 4
5 DE Department Elective‐III 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE Non Department Elective–III 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4331 Communication Systems Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC ECB4332 Digital Signal Processing lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC ECB4333 Design Project ‐III 0 0 2 1 1 2

Total 17 3 8 23 6 28

SEMESTER - VI
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC ECB4316 Computer Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
2 PC ECB4317 Optical Communication 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 PC ECB4318 Antenna and Wave Propagation 3 1 0 4 1 4
4 PC ECB4319 Wireless Communication systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 BS GEA4304 Business Economics 2 0 0 2 1 2
6 DE Department Elective‐IV 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 NE Non Department Elective–IV 2 0 0 2 1 2
8 PC ECB4341 Computer Networks Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC ECB4342 Design Project ‐IV 0 0 2 1 1 2
10 PC ECB4343 Comprehension 1 0 0 1 1 1
Total 20 1 5 23 9 26

31
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER - VII
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC ECB4401 VLSI Design Techniques 3 1 0 4 1 4
2 PC ECB4402 RF and Microwave Engineering 3 1 0 4 1 4
3 PC ECB4403 Internet of Things 3 0 0 3 1 3
Machine Learning & Artificial
4 PC ECB4404 3 1 0 4 1 4
Intelligence
5 DE Department Elective –V 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 NE Non Department Elective‐V 2 0 0 2 1 2
7 PC ECB4431 VLSI Design Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
8 PC ECB4432 Microwave & Optical Lab 0 0 3 1 0 3
9 PC ECB4433 Design Project ‐ V 0 0 2 1 1 2
Total 17 3 8 23 7 28

SEMESTER - VIII
SL. COURSE COURSE
NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
NO CATEGORY CODE
1 PC ECB4441 Project & Viva – voce 0 0 24 8 11 24
Total 0 0 24 8 11 24
Total 165

32
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LIST OF DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES WITH GROUPING - SEMESTER WISE

COURSE COURSE
SEM NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
CATEGORY CODE
3 DE ECC4251 Logic system design with VHDL 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 DE ECC4252 Basic Electrical Engineering 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 DE ECC4253 Instrumentation Engineering 3 0 0 3 1 3
3 DE ECC4254 Microprocessor & Applications 3 0 0 3 1 3

4 DE ECC4266 Digital Image Processing 3 0 0 3 1 3

4 DE ECC4267 Biomedical Instrumentation 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4268 Nano electronic & Devices 3 0 0 3 1 3
4 DE ECC4269 Robotics & Control 3 0 0 3 1 3

5 DE ECC4351 Virtual & Augmented Reality 3 0 0 3 1 3

5 DE ECC4352 Embedded Automotive Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 DE ECC4353 Advanced Microprocessors 3 0 0 3 1 3
5 DE ECC4354 Pattern recognition 3 0 0 3 1 3

6 DE ECC4366 Mobile Communication 3 0 0 3 1 3

6 DE ECC4367 Information Coding Techniques 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4368 Wireless Adhoc Sensor Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4369 Digital Telephone Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4370 Speech Signal Processing 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4371 Radar Systems 3 0 0 3 1 3
6 DE ECC4372 Satellite Communication 3 0 0 3 1 3

7 DE ECC4451 Wireless Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3

7 DE ECC4452 Software Defined Radio 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4453 High Speed Networks 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4454 Remote Sensing 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4455 Opto Electronic Devices 3 0 0 3 1 3
7 DE ECC4456 Industrial Electronics 3 0 0 3 1 3
Advanced Mobile Communication
7 DE ECC4457 3 0 0 3 1 3
Technology

33
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LIST OF NON DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES OFFERED BY ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

DEPARTMENT WITH GROUPING - SEMESTER WISE
SEM COURSE COURSE NAME OF THE COURSE L T P C S TCH
CATEGORY CODE
Introduction to Communication
3 NE ECD4281 2 0 0 2 1 2
Systems
3 NE ECD4282 Programming in MATLAB 2 0 0 2 1 2
Fundamentals of Bluetooth
3 NE ECD4283 2 0 0 2 1 2
Technology

4 NE ECD4291 Neural Networks and Fuzzy Logic 2 0 0 2 1 2

Fundamentals of Microprocessors and
4 NE ECD4292 2 0 0 2 1 2
Microcontrollers
4 NE ECD4293 IoT based Health Care Systems 2 0 0 2 1 2

5 NE ECD4381 Mobile Communication Engineering 2 0 0 2 1 2

Introduction to Data Communication
5 NE ECD4382 2 0 0 2 1 2
System
Introduction to Arduino and its
5 NE ECD4383 2 0 0 2 1 2
applications

Image Processing and Pattern

6 NE ECD4391 2 0 0 2 1 2
Recognition
6 NE ECD4392 Radar and Optical Communication 2 0 0 2 1 2
Fundamentals of Wireless Sensor
6 NE ECD4393 2 0 0 2 1 2
Networks

7 NE ECD4481 Fundamentals of SDR 2 0 0 2 1 2

Radio‐Frequency Identification (RFID)
7 NE ECD4482 2 0 0 2 1 2
and Its applications
Modern Wireless Communication
7 NE ECD4483 2 0 0 2 1 2
Systems
7 NE ECD4484 Introduction to Sensor Technology 2 0 0 2 1 2

34
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – I
COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH AND SOFT SKILLS CREDITS 3
COURSE CODE ELA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 1-1-2-2
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL 6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understanding the importance of professional communication and applying the 6,8,10
1
knowledge
Integrate the knowledge of phonetics, enhancing the listening skills in formal and 6,8,9,10
2 real‐life situations, enhance pronunciation skills based on the knowledge of
phonetics.
Construct appropriate sentences in English Language, applying grammatical rules 6,8,9,10
3 and mastery in syntax. Develop reading skills and derive the contextual meaning,
case studies and analyzing problems
Integrate creativity in the writing skills both in formal and informal situations, 6,8,10
4
related to environment, society and multidisciplinary environments
5 Imbibing soft skills to excel in interpersonal skills essential for workplace 9,10
Prerequisites : Plus Two English‐Intermediate Level
MODULE 1 – THE ELEMENTS OF COMMUNICATION (9L)
Introducing Professional English ‐Process of communication ‐ Principles of Communication‐ Verbal
communication‐ Non Verbal Communication – Business Communication – Cross Cultural
Communication
Suggested Activities:
Self‐introduction‐short conversations‐Situational communication‐dialogue writing ‐Language
Functions‐analyse the speech and comment‐distinguish formal and informal style of communication
Suggested Reading:
Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Press, 2015
Embark, English for Under Graduates by Steve Hart, Arvind Nair, Veena Bhambhani, Cambridge
University Press 2016.
MODULE 2 – LISTENING AND SPEAKING SKILLS (9L)
International Standards of English Pronunciation – International Phonetic Alphabet‐ Symbols and
English Sounds‐ intonation varieties of Spoken English; Indian, American and British ‐Speaking to
Communicate –Listening to Public announcements‐ News Bulletin‐ Instructions – Language Patterns
– Telephone Etiquette
(Note: This unit should be taught in a simple, non-technical manner, avoiding technical terms as
far as possible).
Suggested activities: Listen and repeat, Listening Quiz‐ Listening to native speakers – Identify the
appropriate IPA symbols ‐ TED Talks, short prepared speeches, Table topics – Speaking in different
situations‐ MCQ’s ‐ Cloze exercises‐ Complete the Dialogue – Error corrections
Suggested sources:
Win Win Software (Listening and Speaking Modules) – Language Lab

35
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Press

English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T skills, by Dolly John, Pearson Publications, 2014
edition
MODULE – 3 : GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND FUNCTIONAL READING (9L)
Noun phrase – Verb phrase ‐ Tense and Aspect ‐ Interrogative and Negative sentences – Active Voice
and Passive Voice – Vocabulary ‐ Word formation: prefixes and suffixes, Reading News Report,
Reading and Interpreting Advertisements ‐Reading and Interpreting visual data, charts, tables and
graphs
Suggested Activities:
Identify the errors in sentences, grammar exercise, mini project on suggested reading activity,
reading passage for identifying the contextual meaning, interpreting charts, tables and graphs, choose
the right meaning of the word given
Self Study - Library
Suggested sources:
Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy, Cambridge University Press, 2016 edition
Embark, English for Under Graduates by Steve Hart, Arvind Nair, Veena Bhambhani, Cambridge
University Press 2016.
MODULE – 4 : BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE (9L)
Paragraph writing‐ topic sentence‐connectives ‐ Process writing ‐ Memoranda ‐Business letters
‐ Drafting a report‐ Agenda and Minutes of the Meeting‐ATR‐project proposals‐email etiquette
Suggested activities:
Writing short paragraph based on environment protection, societal issues, health, cultural
contexts etc., identifying topic sentences, linking pairs of sentences, cause and effect exercises,
formal letters, e mails, drafting project proposals, drafting agenda, minutes of the meeting
Suggested sources:
Cambridge Advanced English
Newspapers, library books, IELTS
IELTS Academic Writing 1
New Insights into IELTS, CUP
MODULE 5 – SOFT Skills (9L)
Introduction to Soft skills‐Goal setting‐Time Management‐Stress Management‐Team work‐
Work Place etiquette‐ Social consciousness ‐Environmental consciousness ‐ Civic responsibility
Suggested Activities:
Case studies, Choose the best responses from the statements, Group activities, task based
activities, responses to hypothetical situations
Suggested Sources:
Soft Skills and Employability Skills by Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez, Cambridge University
Press, 2018.
Education and personality development by K. Manoharan, APH Publishing Hoime, 2016

36
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1 An Introduction to Professional English and Soft Skills with audio CD by Dr. Bikram K. Das et al.
Published by Cambridge University Press. 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Soft Skills & Employability Skills by Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez published by Cambridge
University Press 2018.
2 Embark, English for Undergraduates by Steve Hart et al, Cambridge University Press, 2016,
edition
3 Skills for the TOEFL IBT Test, Collins, 2012 edition
4 Soft Skills for Everyone by Jeff Butterfield, Cengage Learning, 2010 edition
5 English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T skills, by Dolly John, Pearson Publications,
2014 edition
6 Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Publications, 2015
E BOOKS
1 https://www.britishcouncil.in/english/courses‐business

2 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/features/pronunciation

3 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/

4 http://www.antimoon.com/how/pronunc‐soundsipa.htm

5 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/write‐and‐improve/

6 Oneshopenglish.com

7 Breakingnews.com
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/english
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/adventures‐writing‐stanford‐online
3 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/mooc/

37
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND COMPUTER AIDED

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
DESIGN (Common to all branches)
COURSE CODE MEA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 1-1-2-2
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL 3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to
Understand drafting and computer aided drafting. Remember the commands 1,2
1
used in AutoCAD to generate simple drawings.
Explain details in a drawing and apply the knowledge to solve simple problems 1,2,5
2
involving straight lines, planes and solids
Understand and Visualize solid objects and apply AutoCAD software commands 1,2,4,5
3
to generate the graphic models
4 Apply the 3D model commands to generate and solid object 1,2,5
Apply the viewing AutoCAD commands to generate top view, front view and 1,2,5
5
additional or sectional views.
Student can able to develop any graphical model of geometrical and simple 1,2,5
6
mechanical objects in AutoCAD software.
Prerequisites : Plus Two English‐Intermediate Level
MODULE 1: BASICS OF ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND PLANE CURVES 12 Hours
Importance of graphics ‐ BIS conventions and specifications ‐ drawing sheet sizes ‐ Lettering –
Dimensioning ‐ Scales. Drafting methods ‐ introduction to Computer Aided Drafting – Computer
Hardware – Workstation – Printer and Plotter – Introduction to software for Computer Aided Design
and Drafting – Exposure to Solid Modelling software – Geometrical Construction‐Coordinate
Systems/Basic Entities – 3D printer.
Self-Study: Solid modelling Software commands
MODULE 2: VISUALIZATION, ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND FREE HAND SKETCHING
15 Hours
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of Three
Dimensional objects — Pictorial Projection methods ‐ Layout of views‐ Free hand sketching of multiple
views from pictorial views of objects. Drafting of simple Geometric Objects/Editing
General principles of presentation of technical drawings as per BIS ‐ Introduction to Orthographic
projections ‐ Naming views as per BIS ‐ First angle projection method. Conversion to orthographic
views from given pictorial views of objects, including dimensioning – Drafting of Orthographic views
from Pictorial views.
Self-study: CAD software commands for sketching a drawing
MODULE 3: GEOMETRICAL MODELING ISOMETRIC VIEWS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
15 Hours
Principles of isometric projection and solid modelling. Isometric drawing ‐ IsoPlanes and 3D Modelling
commands. Projections of Principal Views from 3‐D Models. Solid Modeling – Types of modelling ‐

38
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Wire frame model, Surface Model and Solid Model – Introduction to graphic software for solid
modelling. Development of Surfaces.
Self-study: surface modelling and solid modelling commands
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING 15Hours
Preparation of solid models of machine components like slide block, solid bearing block, bushed
bearing, gland, wall bracket, guide bracket, shaft bracket, jig plate, shaft support (open type),
vertical shaft support etc using appropriate modelling software.
2D views and sectional view, computer aided drafting and dimensioning. Generate 2D drawing from
the 3D models – generate and develop the lateral surfaces of the objects. Presentation Techniques
of Engineering Drawings – Title Blocks – Printing/Plotting the 2D/3D drawing using printer and
printing solid object using 3D printer.
Self-study: CAD commands for modelling and views generation
MODULE 5: SIMPLE DESIGN PROJECTS - COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING 15 Hours
Creation of engineering models and their presentation in standard 2D form, 3D Wire‐Frame and
shaded solids, meshed topologies for engineering analysis, tool‐path generation for component
manufacture, geometric dimensioning and tolerancing. Use of solid‐modelling software for creating
associative models at the components and assembly levels in their respective branch of engineering
like building floor plans that include: windows, doors, fixtures such as WC, Sink, shower, slide block,
etc. Applying colour coding according to drawing practice.
Self-study: CAD commands for modelling and views generation
TEXT BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T, Engineering Drawing and Graphics Using AutoCAD, 7th Edition, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Introduction to AutoCAD – 2D and 3D Design, A.Yarmwood, Newnes
2 Engineering Drawing and Graphic Technology‐International Edition, Thomas E.
3 Engineering Drawing and Design, Sixth Edition, C. Jensen, J.D. Helsel, D.R.
4 Technical Drawing‐Fourteenth Edition, F. E. Giesecke, A. Mitchell, H. C.
5 Bhatt N.D and Panchal V.M, Engineering Drawing: Plane and Solid Geometry,
6 Warren J. Luzadder and Jon. M. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing,
E BOOKS
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐j‐benjamin‐
1
pentex‐free‐ebook‐pdf‐download.html
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐p‐i‐
2
varghese.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104148/
TUTORIAL LINK
1 https://www.jeyapoovan.com
2 Mechanical Engineering Drawing‐Self Taught, Jashua Rose,
http://www.gutenberg.org/files/23319/23319‐h/23319‐h.htm

39
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MATRICES AND CALCULUS

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 4
( Common for all Departments )
COURSE CODE MAA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL - 4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Able to study the concepts of matrices and apply them in related engineering 1,2,3
1
problems.
2 Capable to use the features of Differential Calculus in optimization problems. 1,2,3,4,5,6
3 Able to extend the concepts of integral calculus in finding area and volume. 1,2,3,4
4 Skilled to solve ordinary differential equations in engineering problems. 1,2,4,6,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: MATRICES (13L+2P)
Characteristic equation – Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors – Properties – Cayley Hamilton theorem
(Statement only) – Verification and inverse of the matrix using Cayley Hamilton theorem‐
Diagonalization of matrices using similarity transformation

Suggested Reading: Basics of Matrices

Lab 1: Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors, Verification and inverse using Cayley Hamilton theorem-
Diagonalization
MODULE 2: DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS (13L+2P)
Methods of differentiation of functions – Product and Quotient rules – Inverse trigonometric
functions – Implicit function – parametric form. Partial differentiation – Total differentiation‐ Taylor’s
series – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables

Suggested Reading: Basics of Differentiation

Lab 2: Taylor’s series – Maxima and minima of functions of two variables
MODULE 3: INTEGRAL CALCULUS (13L+2P)
Integration – Methods of integration – Substitution method – Integration by parts – Integration using
partial fraction – Bernoulli’s formula. Applications of Integral Calculus: Area, Surface and Volume.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Integrations
Lab 3: Applications of Integral Calculus: Area, Surface area and Volume.
MODULE 4: ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (13L+2P)
Second order differential equations with constant coefficients – Particular integrals –
eax , Sinax, Cosax, xm , e ax Cos bx, e ax Sin bx. Solutions of homogeneous differential equations with
variable coefficients – Variation of parameters..

Suggested Reading: Basics of Differential Equations.

Lab 4: Solution of Second order differential equations.

40
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB/MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Theory with practical classes
TEXT BOOKS
1 Grewal B.S., “Higher Engineering Mathematics”, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 43rd Edition,
2014
2 Bali N. P and Manish Goyal, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics”, Eighth Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd., 2011.
3 Chandrasekaran A, “A Text book of Engineering Mathematics I”, Dhanam Publications, Chennai,
2010
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Srimantha Pal and Bhunia, S.C, "Engineering Mathematics" Oxford University Press, 2015.
2 Weir, M.D and Joel Hass, Thomas’ Calculus, 12th Edition, Pearson India, 2016.
3 Advanced Engineering Mathematics With Matlab, Third Edition,2011 by CRC Press.
E BOOKS
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/111105035/

2 https://www.edx.org/.../introduction‐engineering‐mathematics‐utarlingtonx‐engr3
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/engineering‐mathematics

41
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING PHYSICS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ECE,EEE,CSE & IT)
COURSE CODE PHA4102 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Solve basic problems in mechanics and also understand the properties of matter. 1,2,3
Have a knowledge of acoustics and ultrasonics which would facilitate in 1,2,3,4
2 acoustical design of buildings and also be able to employ ultrasonics as an
engineering tool.
3 Knowledge on fundamental concepts of Quantum physics 1,2,3,4
4 Fundamental knowledge on semiconductors and discrete devices. 1,2,5
5 Understand the concept, working and application of lasers and fiber optics. 1,2,3,4
Prerequisites : Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1 –PROPERTIES OF MATTER & HEAT (9L)
Elasticity ‐ Hooke’s law – Elastic Moduli – Young’s modulus ‐ Rigidity modulus ‐ Bulk modulus ‐
Twisting couple on a wire ‐ Torsional pendulum ‐ determination of rigidity modulus of a wire ‐
Depression of a cantilever ‐ Young’s modulus by cantilever ‐ uniform and non‐uniform bending.
Thermal conductivity – experimental determination of thermal conductivity of good and bad
conductors – Forbe’s method – theory and experiment – Lee’s disc method for bad conductors.
MODULE 2 – ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS (9L)
Classification of sound ‐ Characteristics of musical sound – intensity ‐ loudness ‐ Weber Fechner law ‐
Decibel ‐ Reverberation ‐ Reverberation time, derivation of Sabine’s formula for reverberation time
(Jaeger’s method) ‐ absorption coefficient and its determination ‐ factors affecting acoustics of
building (Optimum reverberation time, loudness, focusing, echo, echelon effect, resonance and noise)
and their remedies
Ultrasonics‐ Production – Magnetostriction and Piezoelectric methods – properties – applications
MODULE 3 – QUANTUM PHYSICS (9L)
Black body radiation‐ Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien's displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jean’s law from Planck's theory ‐ Compton effect – Theory and experimental verification
Schrödinger's wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical
significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box ‐ Extension to 3 dimension (no
derivation)
MODULE 4 – SEMICONDUCTORS (9L)
Classification of semiconductors – Intrinsic & Extrinsic Semiconductors (Qualitative Treatment) –
Direct & Indirect band gap – semiconductor Hall Effect – Determination of Hall Coefficient.
PN junction diode – Construction, working & VI characteristics, Zener diode ‐ Construction, working
& VI characteristics – Zener diode as voltage regulator – Transistors ‐ Construction & working – CE &
CB Configuration characteristics curves.

42
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS (9L)

Principle of lasers ‐ Stimulated absorption ‐ Spontaneous emission, stimulated emission ‐ population
inversion ‐ pumping action ‐ active medium ‐ laser characteristics – Nd‐YAG laser ‐ CO2 laser ‐
Semiconductor laser ‐ applications ‐ optical fiber ‐ principle and propagation of light in optical fibers
‐ Numerical aperture and acceptance angle ‐ types of optical fibers ‐ single and multimode, step index
and graded index fibers ‐ fiber optic communication system.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1 P.Mani, “ Engineering Physics”, Vol‐I & II, Dhanam Publications, Chennai. (2011)
2 Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L., “Engineering Physics”, 8th edition, Dhanpat Rai publications (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi. (2010)
3 Arthur Beiser, "Concepts of Modern Physics", Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publications. (2007)
4 Rajendran V. Marikani A., “Applied Physics for engineers”, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw –Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. (2003)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Arthur Beiser, "Concepts of Modern Physics", Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publications. (2007)
2 Rajendran V. Marikani A., “Applied Physics for engineers”, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw –Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. (2003)
E BOOKS
1 https://www.bookyards.com/en/book/details/13921/Elements‐Of‐Properties‐Of‐Matter

2 http://iopscience.iop.org/book/978‐1‐6817‐4585‐5

3 https://www.springer.com/in/book/9783319206295
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/115106061/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/12

43
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING MATERIALS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)
COURSE CODE CYA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Student will be able to ‐ Suggest suitable metals for alloying. 1,2,3
2 Identify the materials apt for engineering applications. 1,2,3,5
3 Select high temperature materials for engineering applications. 1,2,3,5
4 Map the properties of nanomaterials with their applications. 1,2,5
5 Suggest suitable materials for electronic applications. 1,2,3,12
Prerequisites : Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1 – CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND PHASE RULE (9L)
Basic Crystal Systems – Types, characteristics, examples – Space lattice, Unit cell – types – X‐ray
diffraction and crystal structure.
Basic terminology ‐ Derivation of Gibbs Phase rule‐ Phase diagrams: One component system (water),
Two component system –‐ Reduced phase rule: Simple Eutectic system, examples, Phase diagram: Ag‐
Pb system, Pb‐Sn system – Applications of phase rule.
MODULE 2 – POWDER METALLURGY, INORGANIC MATERIALS AND COMPOSITES. (9L)
Steel – Composition, types, heat‐treatment, Abrasives – Classification, Properties, Uses ‐ Refractories
– Classification, Properties, Applications. Glasses – Properties, Types, Specialty glasses.
Composites ‐ Introduction ‐ Definition – Constituents – Classification ‐ Fiber‐reinforced Composites –
Types and Applications.
Powder Metallurgy – Preparation of metal/alloy– Advantages and limitations.
MODULE 3 – NANOMATERIALS AND MOLECULAR SIEVES (9L)
Introduction – Synthesis of Nanomaterials ‐ Bottom‐up and Top‐down approaches – Methods of
preparation – Sol‐gel process, Gas‐phase condensation, Chemical Vapour Deposition. Properties –
Optical, Electrical, Magnetic, Chemical properties (introduction only). Characterization – FE‐SEM, TEM
(Principle and Applications only).
Zeolite Molecular sieves – composition, structure, classification ‐ applications – ion exchange,
adsorption, separation, laundry, catalysis.
MODULE 4 – MATERIALS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATONS (9L)
Liquid Crystals‐ Introduction – Characteristics – Classification‐ Thermotropic crystals‐ ‐ Polymorphism
in Thermotropic Liquid Crystals – Molecular arrangement in various states of Liquid Crystals, Lyotropic
Liquid Crystals‐ Applications.
Conducting and Super conducting Organic electronic materials ‐ Applications.
Engineering plastics: Polycarbonate – Properties and uses‐ Conducting Polymers: Classification,
Intrinsic Conducting Polymers, Extrinsic Conducting Polymers, Applications ‐ Biodegradable
Polymers, examples and applications.

44
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – LUBRICANTS, ADHESIVES AND EXPLOSIVES (9L)

Lubricants – Mechanism of Lubrication, Classification and Properties, Semi Solid Lubricants, Solid
Lubricants, MoS2 and Graphite ‐ Adhesives – Development of Adhesive strength, Physical and
Chemical factors influencing adhesive action, Classification of Adhesives – Epoxy Resin (Preparation,
Properties and Applications). Explosives – Requisites, Classification, Precautions during storage –
Rocket propellants – Requisites ‐ Classification.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1 P.C. Jain and Monicka Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Raj Publishing Company (P) Ltd, New
Delhi – 2012
2 Puri, Sharma and Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co. Jalandar, 2004.
3 Composite materials, K.K. Chawala, 3rd ed., (2012) Springer‐Verlag, New York
4 Nanocomposite Science and Technology, P. M. Ajayan, L. S. Schadler, P. V. Braun, (2003), Wiley‐
VCH Verlag GmbH Co. KGaA, Weinheim.
5 Mechanics and Analysis of Composite Materials, V.V. Vasiliev and E.V. Morozov, (2001), Elsevier
Science Ltd, The Boulevard, Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford OX5 lGB, UK.
E BOOKS
http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐
1
ebook.html
2 https://abmpk.files.wordpress.com/2014/02/book_maretial‐science‐callister.pdf`
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/materials‐science‐engineering‐misisx‐mse1x
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/materials‐science

45
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE PROBLEM SOLVING USING C CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE CSA4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2-0-2-1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Acquire basic knowledge about computers and number systems 1,2
2 Able to draw flowchart, write algorithm/pseudo code to solve the given problem 1,2,3,4
3 Able to write basic C programs to solve the given problem 3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1 ‐ COMPUTER FUNDAMENTALS (10L+2P)
Introduction – Evolution of Computer – Generations of Computer – Classification of Computers –
Application of Computers ‐ Components of a Computer System – Hardware ‐ Software ‐ Starting a
Computer (Booting) – Number Systems‐ Conversion.
MODULE 2 - PROBLEM SOLVING TECHNIQUES AND LANGUAGES (10L+2P)
Introduction ‐ Problem‐Solving Techniques: Algorithms, Flowchart, Pseudocode ‐ Program Control
Structures – Programming Paradigms – Programming languages – Generations of Programming
Languages – Language Translators – Features of a Good Programming Languages.
MODULE 3 - FUNDAMENTALS OF C (6L+6P)
Introduction to C ‐ The C Declaration ‐ Operators and Expressions – Input and Output statements in C
– Decision Statements – Loop Control Statements.
MODULE 4 - FUNCTIONS, ARRAYS AND STRINGS (6L+6P)
Functions – Storage Class – Arrays – Working with strings and standard functions.
MODULE 5 - POINTERS, STRUCTURES AND UNION (6L+6P)
Pointers – Dynamic Memory allocation – Structure and Union – Files.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T, “Fundamentals of Computing and Programming in C”, Vikas Publishing house, 2015
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ashok Kamthane, “Computer Programming”, Pearson Education, 7th Edition, Inc 2017
2 Yashavant Kanetkar, “Let us C”, 15th edition, BPP publication 2016
3 Brian Kernighan, Dennis Ritchie, "The C Programming Language",2nd edition, Phi Learning, 1988.
E BOOKS
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/C_Programming
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105085/2

46
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE EEB4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3- 0- 0- 1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 To understand basic operation in digital systems and instruments. 1,6
2 To gain knowledge on basic functioning of sensors and display units. 1,5,6
3 To familiarize the concepts of signal processing and converting elements. 1,3,4,5
4 To acquire the knowledge of microcontrollers and applications 3,4,5,6
To attain the basic concepts of consumer electronics and communication 1,5,6,12
5
devices.
Prerequisites : Physics and Mathematics
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SYSTEMS (9L)
Analog& Digital signals ‐ Need for digital instruments – Elements of digital instruments – Number
systems: ‐ Binary, Hexadecimal ‐ Logic gates ‐ Boolean algebra (Identities and Properties) ‐ Digital
controllers (ON‐OFF).
Suggested Reading: Basics of number systems.
MODULE 2 –SENSORS AND DISPLAYS (9L)
Sensors and Transducers –Classification, Potentiometer, Strain Gauge, Piezoelectric Sensor, Linear
Variable Differential Transformer, Resistance temperature detectors (RTD), Thermocouples, Tactile
transducers ‐ Displays: ‐ Light Emitting Diode (including OLED) displays.
Suggested Reading: Primary sensing elements, introduction to displays.
MODULE – 3 : SIGNAL CONDITIONING CIRCUITS (9L)
D.C. Bridge‐ Unbalanced, Push‐Pull configuration, Operational amplifiers‐ Inverting, Non‐Inverting,
Instrumentation Amplifier, Active filters: ‐ Low pass, High pass ‐ Analog to Digital Converter –
Successive Approximation, Digital to Analog Converter ‐ Weighted Resistor.
Suggested Reading: Basic network theorems.
MODULE – 4 :INTRODUCTION TO MICRO CONTROLLERS (9L)
Introduction: Memory types, peripheral devices‐ Microcontroller (8 bit), Architecture, Graphics
Processing Unit (GPU) ‐ Applications: ‐Interfacing of Digital Input/Output, Analogue
Input/Output, Display. Introduction to Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) and PID
(Proportional + Integral + Derivative) Controller.
Suggested Reading: Hobby electronics with Microcontroller interface.
MODULE 5 – CONSUMER ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM (9L)
Consumer Electronics: Television, Mobile Phones, Air conditioners, Refrigerators, Washing Machine.
(Block diagram approach only.)
Communication System: Satellite communication, Global Positioning Systems, Global System for
Mobile. (Block diagram approach only.)
Suggested Reading: Consumer Electronics User Manuals.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
Field trip to consumer electronics industry.

47
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1 Digital Fundamentals, Thomas l. Floyd, 11th edition, Pearson 2014.
2 Op‐amps and Linear Integrated Circuits, Ramakant A. Gayakwad, 4th edition, Prentice Hall, 2015.
3 Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, David A. Bell, Oxford University Press, 2013.
4 The 8051 Microcontroller And Embedded Systems Using Assembly And C, SepehrNaimi,
SarmadNaimi, Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Second edition, 2017.
5 Programmable Logic Controllers, Frank D. Petruzella, McGraw‐Hill Education, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Digital Logic and Computer Design, M. Morris Mano, Prentice‐Hall, 2016
2 Linear Integrated Circuits, Roy Choudhury, New Age International Publishers, 4th edition, 2011
3 C and 8051, Thomas W. Schultz, Thomas W. Schultz Publishers, 4th edition,2008
4 Consumer Electronics, S.P Bali, Pearson Education Asia Pvt., Ltd., 2008 Edition
5 Global Mobile Satellite Communications Applications (For Maritime, Land and Aeronautical
Applications Volume 2), 2nd edition, Springer, 2018
E BOOKS
1 http://www.ee.iitm.ac.in/~giri/pdfs/EE4140/textbook.pdf
2 https://electronics.howstuffworks.com/home‐audio‐video‐channel.htm
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108099/Digital%20Systems.pdf
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/pdf/mod2.pdf
3 http://www.nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse‐contents/IISc‐
BANG/Microprocessors%20and%20Microcontrollers/pdf/Teacher_Slides/mod3/M3L6.pdf
4 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105063/pdf/L‐09(SS)(IA&C)%20((EE)NPTEL).pdf

48
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB CREDIT

COURSE CODE GEA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-2
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to Identify
1 and use of tools, Types of joints used in welding, carpentry and plumbing 1,2,4,6,12
operations.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques such as carpentry and
2 1,2,4,6,12
plumbing practices.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques of different types of
3 1,2,4,6,12
welding and basic machining practices.
SLOT X - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP
1.Welding: Arc welding: Butt joints
2.Lap joints.
3.Machining: Facing
4.Turning
II. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
1. Dismantling and Studying of two stroke gasoline engine.
2. Assembling of two stroke gasoline engine.
3. Dismantling and Studying of four stroke gasoline engine
4. Assembling of four stroke gasoline engine.
III. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of Flow Pattern around Various Objects.
2. Force measurement on Aircraft Model
3. Determination of Young's Modulus for Aluminum Cantilever Beam
4. Binary Addition & Subtraction using Microprocessor
IV. CIVIL ENGINEERING
1. Plumbing‐ Basic Pipe Connection using valves, couplings and elbows.
2. Carpentry – Sowing, Planning and making common Joints.
3. Bar Bending
4. Construction of a 50 cm height brick wall without mortar using English Bond.
SLOT Y - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
V.ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
1. Study of tools and accessories.
2. Study of cables.
3. Staircase wiring, Tube light and Fan connection.
4. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
VI. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Active and Passive Components.
2. Study of Logic Circuits.
3. Making simple circuit using Electronic Components.
4. Measuring of parameters for signal using CRO.

49
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VII. COMPUTER SCIENCE

1. Troubleshooting different parts of the computer peripherals, Monitor, Keyboard & CPU.
2. Installation of various operating systems, their capabilities, Windows, Unix, Linux.
3. Installation of commonly used software like MS Office
4. Assembling digital computer.
VIII. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
1. Study of Key Elements of Mechatronics Systems
2. Sensors – Load Cell, Thermocouple
3. Actuators – Linear & Rotary Actuators
4. Interfacing & Measurements – Virtual Instrumentation
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T and Saravanapandian M., Engineering practices lab manual, 4th Edition, Vikas
publishing House, New Delhi, 2015.
2 Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
3 Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011
4 Robert Quesada, Jeyapoovan T., Computer Numerical Control Machining and Turning Centers,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006
METHOD OF ALLOCATION FOR ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB
SLOT X : MECH, AERO, AUTO, CIVIL EXPERIMENTS
SLOT Y : EEE, ELECTRONICS, CSE, MECHATRONICS EXPERIMENTS
 EVERY CLASS OF
 GROUP A (AERO, AUTO, MECH, MCT, CHEM, BIO, CIVIL
 GROUP B (CSE, IT, ECE, EEE, AEROSPACE)
GETS DIVIDED INTO 4 SUB ‐ GROUPS NAMELY a, b, c, d ‐‐ EACH CONSISTING OF 15 TO 20 STUDENTS
MAX.
 FOR EXAMPLE: GROUP A STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT X
 WEEK 1 : SLOT X ‐‐‐
 a – MECH; b – AUTO; c – AERO ; d – CIVIL
 WEEK 2 : SLOT X ‐‐‐
 b – MECH; c – AUTO; d – AERO ; a – CIVIL
 THE ABOVE SCHEDULE WILL BE ON ROTATION EVERY MONTH (ONE CYLCE PER MONTH)
 GROUP B STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT Y
 WEEK 1 : SLOT Y ‐‐‐
 a – EEE; b – ECE; c – CSE ; d – MCT
 WEEK 2 : SLOT Y ‐‐‐
 b – EEE; c – ECE; d – CSE ; a – MCT
 THE ABOVE SCHEDULE WILL BE ON ROTATION EVERY MONTH (ONE CYLCE PER MONTH)

50
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

COURSE TITLE (Common to all engineering branches) CREDIT 1

COURSE CODE PHA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0

CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL 3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Ability to analyze material’s elastic properties 1,2
2 Ability to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor 1,2

3 Ability to measure coefficient of viscosity of liquids 1,2

4 Ability to determine wavelength of laser 1,2
5 Ability to describe V‐I characteristics of diode 1,2
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic physics practical at higher secondary level.
List of Experiments (Any Five Experiments)
1. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a wire.
2. Non Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
3. Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
4. Viscosity – Determination of co‐efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s flow.
5. Lee’s Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
6. Air – Wedge – Determination of thickness of a thin wire
7. Spectrometer – refractive index of a prism
8. Semiconductor laser – Determination of wavelength of laser using grating
9. Semiconductor diode – VI characteristics
TEXT BOOKS
1 P. Mani, engineering Physics Practicals, Dhanam Publications, Chennai, 2005 0020
REFERENCE
1 Glenn V.Lo, Jesus Urrechaga ‐ Aituna, Introductory Physics Laboratory Manual, Part‐I, Fall 2005
Edition.
2 P. Kulkarni, Experiments in Engineering Physics Bachelor of Engineering and Technology, Edition
2015
E BOOK
1 http://www.aurora.ac.in/images/pdf/departments/humanities‐and‐sciences/engg‐phy‐lab‐
manual.pdf

51
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MATERIALS CHEMISTRY LAB

COURSE TITLE CREDIT 1
(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
COURSE CODE CYA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Students learn to characterize basic properties of refractory ceramics 1,2,3
2 On completion of this course, students learn to prepare resins and composites. 1,2,3
Students learn to estimate metal ions present in samples using instrumental 1,2,3
3
techniques.
4 On completion of the course the students learn to develop adsorption isotherm. 1,2,3
5 Students learn to find properties of lubricants and other oil samples. 1,2,3
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic chemistry practical at higher secondary level.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
1. Construction of Phenol‐Water Phase diagram.
2. Determination of viscosity of polymer using Ostwald Viscometer.
3. Preparation of urea‐formaldehyde resin.
4. Determination of porosity of a refractory.
5. Determination of Apparent Density of porous solids.
6. Determination of Viscosity Index of lubricants.
7. Estimation of dye content in the effluent by UV‐Visible spectrophotometry.
8. Determination of viscosity of oil using Red‐Wood Viscometer.
9. Determination of Copper / iron content in the alloy by colorimetry.
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium ions by Flame Photometry.
11. Verification of Beer‐Lambert’s law using gold nanoparticles.
12. Determination of adsorption isotherm for acetic acid on activated charcoal.
REFERENCE
1 J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J.D. Barnes and N.J.K. Thomas, Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
Chemical Analysis, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
2 D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8th edition, McGraw Hill,
London, 2008
3 S. Sumathi, Laboratory work book for Engineering Chemistry Practical, 2015
4 Laboratory Manual of Testing Materials, William Kendrick Hatt and Herbert Henry Scofield,
Andesite Press, 2017
E BOOK
1 http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐ebook.html
MOOC
1 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/chemistry/5‐111‐principles‐of‐chemical‐science‐fall‐2008/video‐
lectures/lecture‐32/
2 https://www.coursetalk.com/providers/coursera/courses/introduction‐to‐chemistry‐1

52
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – II

ANALYTICAL MATHEMATICS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 4
(Except Aeronautical and Aerospace Engineering)
COURSE CODE MAA4117 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-2-0
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL- 4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Competent to evaluate surface and volume integrals. 1,2,3
2 Able to perform vector operations and interpret the results geometrically. 1,2,3,4
Skilled to solve the system of ordinary differential equations using Laplace 1,2,3,4
3
Transform
Proficient to know that any periodic function satisfying Dirichlet’s conditions can 1,2,5
4
be expressed as a Fourier series
Able to understand complex variable theory, applications of analytic function 1,2,3
5
and harmonic conjugate.
Prerequisites : NIL
MODULE 1: MULTIPLE INTEGRALS (10L+2P)
Double integration – Cartesian and polar co‐ordinates – Change of order of integration. Area as a
double integral – Triple integration in Cartesian coordinates – Volume as a triple integral – Change of
variables between Cartesian and polar coordinates.
Suggested Reading: Line Integrals
Lab: Area and Volume of double integration and triple integration.
MODULE 2: VECTOR CALCULUS (10L+2P)
Gradient, Divergence and Curl – Unit normal vector, Directional derivative – angle between surfaces
– Solenoidal and Irrotational vector fields. Green’s theorem ‐ Gauss divergence theorem and Stoke’s
theorem (without proof) – Verification and evaluation of the above theorems ‐ Simple applications to
regions such as square, rectangle, triangle, cuboids and rectangular parallelopipeds.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Vectors
Lab: Area using Green’s theorem and Volume using Gauss divergence theorem
MODULE 3: LAPLACE TRANSFORMS (10L+2P)
Laplace transform – Conditions of existence – Transform of elementary functions – properties –
Transforms of derivatives– Initial and final value theorems – Transform of periodic functions. Inverse
Laplace transforms using partial fraction and convolution theorem. Solution of linear ODE of second
order with constant coefficients.
Suggested Reading: Basics of Transform
Lab: Finding Laplace and Inverse Laplace Transform of Elementary Functions, Solutions of Ordinary
differential equations using Laplace transform

53
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 4: FOURIER SERIES (10L+2P)

Dirichlet’s Conditions – General Fourier Series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine and cosine
series –Harmonic Analysis.
Suggested Reading: Basics of series
Lab: Fourier series Expansion of simple functions, Harmonic Analysis
MODULE 5: COMPLEX VARIABLES (10L+2P)
Functions of a complex variable – Analytic function – Cauchy ‐ Riemann equations (Statement only) –
Properties of analytic function (Statement only) – Construction of Analytic functions by Milne –
Thomson method.
Suggested Reading: Complex Numbers
Lab: Complex Numbers
LAB/MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
Theory with practical classes
TEXT BOOKS
1 Kreyszig Erwin, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics ", John Wiley and Sons, 10th Edition, New
Delhi, 2016.
2 A.P.Santhakumaran, P.Titus, Engineering Mathematics ‐ II, NiMeric Publications, Nagercoil, 2012
3 Chandrasekaran A, Engineering Mathematics‐ II, Dhanam Publication, 2014
4 Raj Kumar Bansal,Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications in
Engineering”, Pearson Publication, Second Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Sastry, S.S, ―Engineering Mathema cs", Vol. I & II, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd, 4th Edition, New Delhi,
2014
2 Wylie, R.C. and Barre , L.C., ―Advanced Engineering Mathema cs ―Tata McGraw Hill
Education Pvt. Ltd, 6th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.
3 Dean G. Duffy., “Advanced Ebgineering Mathematics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Third Edition
2013.
E BOOKS
1 http.// nptel.ac.in/courses/122104017/28

2 https://www.khanacademy.org/.../double‐integrals.../double‐integral.

3 nptel.ac.in/courses/115101005/downloads/lectures‐doc/Lecture‐1.pdf

4 nptel.ac.in/syllabus/122104017/

5 nptel.ac.in/courses/111105035/22

6 nptel.ac.in/syllabus/111103070/
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐engineering‐mathematics‐utarlingtonx‐engr3‐0x

54
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING PHYSICS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ECE,EEE,CSE & IT)
COURSE CODE PHA4102 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Solve basic problems in mechanics and also understand the properties of matter. 1,2,3
Have a knowledge of acoustics and ultrasonics which would facilitate in 1,2,3,4
2 acoustical design of buildings and also be able to employ ultrasonics as an
engineering tool.
3 Knowledge on fundamental concepts of Quantum physics 1,2,3,4
4 Fundamental knowledge on semiconductors and discrete devices. 1,2,5
5 Understand the concept, working and application of lasers and fiber optics. 1,2,3,4
Prerequisites : Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1 –PROPERTIES OF MATTER & HEAT (9L)
Elasticity ‐ Hooke’s law – Elastic Moduli – Young’s modulus ‐ Rigidity modulus ‐ Bulk modulus ‐
Twisting couple on a wire ‐ Torsional pendulum ‐ determination of rigidity modulus of a wire ‐
Depression of a cantilever ‐ Young’s modulus by cantilever ‐ uniform and non‐uniform bending.
Thermal conductivity – experimental determination of thermal conductivity of good and bad
conductors – Forbe’s method – theory and experiment – Lee’s disc method for bad conductors.
MODULE 2 – ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS (9L)
Classification of sound ‐ Characteristics of musical sound – intensity ‐ loudness ‐ Weber Fechner law ‐
Decibel ‐ Reverberation ‐ Reverberation time, derivation of Sabine’s formula for reverberation time
(Jaeger’s method) ‐ absorption coefficient and its determination ‐ factors affecting acoustics of
building (Optimum reverberation time, loudness, focusing, echo, echelon effect, resonance and noise)
and their remedies
Ultrasonics‐ Production – Magnetostriction and Piezoelectric methods – properties – applications
MODULE 3 – QUANTUM PHYSICS (9L)
Black body radiation‐ Planck’s theory (derivation) – Deduction of Wien's displacement law and
Rayleigh – Jean’s law from Planck's theory ‐ Compton effect – Theory and experimental verification
Schrödinger's wave equation – Time independent and time dependent equations – Physical
significance of wave function – Particle in a one dimensional box ‐ Extension to 3 dimension (no
derivation)
MODULE 4 – SEMICONDUCTORS (9L)
Classification of semiconductors – Intrinsic & Extrinsic Semiconductors (Qualitative Treatment) –
Direct & Indirect band gap – semiconductor Hall Effect – Determination of Hall Coefficient.
PN junction diode – Construction, working & VI characteristics, Zener diode ‐ Construction, working
& VI characteristics – Zener diode as voltage regulator – Transistors ‐ Construction & working – CE &
CB Configuration characteristics curves.

55
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – PHOTONICS AND FIBRE OPTICS (9L)

Principle of lasers ‐ Stimulated absorption ‐ Spontaneous emission, stimulated emission ‐
population inversion ‐ pumping action ‐ active medium ‐ laser characteristics – Nd‐YAG laser ‐ CO2
laser ‐ Semiconductor laser ‐ applications ‐ optical fiber ‐ principle and propagation of light in optical
fibers ‐ Numerical aperture and acceptance angle ‐ types of optical fibers ‐ single and multimode,
step index and graded index fibers ‐ fiber optic communication system.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1 P.Mani, “ Engineering Physics”, Vol‐I & II, Dhanam Publications, Chennai. (2011)
2 Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L., “Engineering Physics”, 8th edition, Dhanpat Rai publications (P) Ltd.,
New Delhi. (2010)
3 Arthur Beiser, "Concepts of Modern Physics", Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publications. (2007)
4 Rajendran V. Marikani A., “Applied Physics for engineers”, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw –Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. (2003)
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Arthur Beiser, "Concepts of Modern Physics", Tata Mc Graw – Hill Publications. (2007)
2 Rajendran V. Marikani A., “Applied Physics for engineers”, 3rd edition, Tata Mc Graw –Hill
publishing company Ltd., New Delhi. (2003)
E BOOKS
1 https://www.bookyards.com/en/book/details/13921/Elements‐Of‐Properties‐Of‐Matter

2 http://iopscience.iop.org/book/978‐1‐6817‐4585‐5

3 https://www.springer.com/in/book/9783319206295
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/115106061/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/12

56
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING MATERIALS
COURSE TITLE CREDITS 3
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)
COURSE CODE CYA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Student will be able to ‐ Suggest suitable metals for alloying. 1,2,3
2 Identify the materials apt for engineering applications. 1,2,3,5
3 Select high temperature materials for engineering applications. 1,2,3,5
4 Map the properties of nanomaterials with their applications. 1,2,5
5 Suggest suitable materials for electronic applications. 1,2,3,12
Prerequisites : Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level.
MODULE 1 – CRYSTAL STRUCTURE AND PHASE RULE (9L)
Basic Crystal Systems – Types, characteristics, examples – Space lattice, Unit cell – types – X‐ray
diffraction and crystal structure.
Basic terminology ‐ Derivation of Gibbs Phase rule‐ Phase diagrams: One component system (water),
Two component system –‐ Reduced phase rule: Simple Eutectic system, examples, Phase diagram: Ag‐
Pb system, Pb‐Sn system – Applications of phase rule.
MODULE 2 – POWDER METALLURGY, INORGANIC MATERIALS AND COMPOSITES (9L)
Steel – Composition, types, heat‐treatment, Abrasives – Classification, Properties, Uses ‐ Refractories
– Classification, Properties, Applications. Glasses – Properties, Types, Specialty glasses.
Composites ‐ Introduction ‐ Definition – Constituents – Classification ‐ Fiber‐reinforced Composites –
Types and Applications.
Powder Metallurgy – Preparation of metal/alloy– Advantages and limitations.
MODULE 3 – NANOMATERIALS AND MOLECULAR SIEVES (9L)
Introduction – Synthesis of Nanomaterials ‐ Bottom‐up and Top‐down approaches – Methods of
preparation – Sol‐gel process, Gas‐phase condensation, Chemical Vapour Deposition. Properties –
Optical, Electrical, Magnetic, Chemical properties (introduction only). Characterization – FE‐SEM, TEM
(Principle and Applications only).
Zeolite Molecular sieves – composition, structure, classification ‐ applications – ion exchange,
adsorption, separation, laundry, catalysis.
MODULE 4 – MATERIALS FOR ELECTRONIC APPLICATONS (9L)
Liquid Crystals‐ Introduction – Characteristics – Classification‐ Thermotropic crystals‐ ‐ Polymorphism
in Thermotropic Liquid Crystals – Molecular arrangement in various states of Liquid Crystals, Lyotropic
Liquid Crystals‐ Applications.
Conducting and Super conducting Organic electronic materials ‐ Applications.
Engineering plastics: Polycarbonate – Properties and uses‐ Conducting Polymers: Classification,
Intrinsic Conducting Polymers, Extrinsic Conducting Polymers, Applications ‐ Biodegradable
Polymers, examples and applications.

57
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – LUBRICANTS, ADHESIVES AND EXPLOSIVES (9L)

Lubricants – Mechanism of Lubrication, Classification and Properties, Semi Solid Lubricants, Solid
Lubricants, MoS2 and Graphite ‐ Adhesives – Development of Adhesive strength, Physical and
Chemical factors influencing adhesive action, Classification of Adhesives – Epoxy Resin (Preparation,
Properties and Applications). Explosives – Requisites, Classification, Precautions during storage –
Rocket propellants – Requisites ‐ Classification.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1 P.C. Jain and Monicka Jain, Engineering Chemistry, Dhanpat Raj Publishing Company (P) Ltd, New
Delhi – 2012
2 Puri, Sharma and Pathania, Principles of Physical Chemistry, Vishal Publishing Co. Jalandar, 2004.
3 Composite materials, K.K. Chawala, 3rd ed., (2012) Springer‐Verlag, New York
4 Nanocomposite Science and Technology, P. M. Ajayan, L. S. Schadler, P. V. Braun, (2003), Wiley‐
VCH Verlag GmbH Co. KGaA, Weinheim.
5 Mechanics and Analysis of Composite Materials, V.V. Vasiliev and E.V. Morozov, (2001), Elsevier
Science Ltd, The Boulevard, Langford Lane, Kidlington, Oxford OX5 lGB, UK.
E BOOKS
http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐
1
ebook.html
2 https://abmpk.files.wordpress.com/2014/02/book_maretial‐science‐callister.pdf`
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/materials‐science‐engineering‐misisx‐mse1x
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/materials‐science

58
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ENGLISH AND SOFT SKILLS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ELA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 1-1-2-1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL 6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understanding the importance of professional communication and applying the 6,8,10
1
knowledge
Integrate the knowledge of phonetics, enhancing the listening skills in formal and 6,8,9,10
2 real‐life situations, enhance pronunciation skills based on the knowledge of
phonetics.
Construct appropriate sentences in English Language, applying grammatical rules 6,8,9,10
3 and mastery in syntax. Develop reading skills and derive the contextual meaning,
case studies and analyzing problems
Integrate creativity in the writing skills both in formal and informal situations, 6,8,10
4
related to environment, society and multidisciplinary environments
5 Imbibing soft skills to excel in interpersonal skills essential for workplace 9,10
Prerequisites : Plus Two English‐Intermediate Level
MODULE 1 – THE ELEMENTS OF COMMUNICATION (9L)
Introducing Professional English ‐Process of communication ‐ Principles of Communication‐ Verbal
communication‐ Non Verbal Communication – Business Communication – Cross Cultural
Communication
Suggested Activities:
Self‐introduction‐short conversations‐Situational communication‐dialogue writing ‐Language
Functions‐analyse the speech and comment‐distinguish formal and informal style of communication
Suggested Reading:
Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Press, 2015
Embark, English for Under Graduates by Steve Hart, Arvind Nair, Veena Bhambhani, Cambridge
University Press 2016.
MODULE 2 – LISTENING AND SPEAKING SKILLS (9L)
International Standards of English Pronunciation – International Phonetic Alphabet‐ Symbols and
English Sounds‐ intonation varieties of Spoken English; Indian, American and British ‐Speaking to
Communicate –Listening to Public announcements‐ News Bulletin‐ Instructions – Language Patterns
– Telephone Etiquette
(Note: This unit should be taught in a simple, non-technical manner, avoiding technical terms as
far as possible).
Suggested activities: Listen and repeat, Listening Quiz‐ Listening to native speakers – Identify the
appropriate IPA symbols ‐ TED Talks, short prepared speeches, Table topics – Speaking in different
situations‐ MCQ’s ‐ Cloze exercises‐ Complete the Dialogue – Error corrections
Suggested sources:
Win Win Software (Listening and Speaking Modules) – Language Lab
Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Press

59
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T skills, by Dolly John, Pearson Publications, 2014
edition
MODULE – 3 : GRAMMAR, VOCABULARY AND FUNCTIONAL READING (9L)
Noun phrase – Verb phrase ‐ Tense and Aspect ‐ Interrogative and Negative sentences – Active Voice
and Passive Voice – Vocabulary ‐ Word formation: prefixes and suffixes, Reading News Report,
Reading and Interpreting Advertisements ‐Reading and Interpreting visual data, charts, tables and
graphs
Suggested Activities:
Identify the errors in sentences, grammar exercise, mini project on suggested reading activity,
reading passage for identifying the contextual meaning, interpreting charts, tables and graphs, choose
the right meaning of the word given
Self Study - Library
Suggested sources:
Essential English Grammar by Raymond Murphy, Cambridge University Press, 2016 edition
Embark, English for Under Graduates by Steve Hart, Arvind Nair, Veena Bhambhani, Cambridge
University Press 2016.
MODULE – 4 : BUSINESS CORRESPONDENCE (9L)
Paragraph writing‐ topic sentence‐connectives ‐ Process writing ‐ Memoranda ‐Business letters
‐ Drafting a report‐ Agenda and Minutes of the Meeting‐ATR‐project proposals‐email etiquette
Suggested activities:
Writing short paragraph based on environment protection, societal issues, health, cultural
contexts etc., identifying topic sentences, linking pairs of sentences, cause and effect exercises,
formal letters, e mails, drafting project proposals, drafting agenda, minutes of the meeting
Suggested sources:
Cambridge Advanced English
Newspapers, library books, IELTS
IELTS Academic Writing 1
New Insights into IELTS, CUP
MODULE 5 – SOFT SKILLS (9L)
Introduction to Soft skills‐Goal setting‐Time Management‐Stress Management‐Team work‐
Work Place etiquette‐ Social consciousness ‐Environmental consciousness ‐ Civic responsibility
Suggested Activities:
Case studies, Choose the best responses from the statements, Group activities, task based
activities, responses to hypothetical situations
Suggested Sources:
Soft Skills and Employability Skills by Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez, Cambridge University
Press, 2018.
Education and personality development by K. Manoharan, APH Publishing Hoime, 2016

60
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1 An Introduction to Professional English and Soft Skills with audio CD by Dr. Bikram K. Das et al.
Published by Cambridge University Press. 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Soft Skills & Employability Skills by Sabina Pillai and Agna Fernandez published by Cambridge
University Press 2018.
2 Embark, English for Undergraduates by Steve Hart et al, Cambridge University Press, 2016,
edition
3 Skills for the TOEFL IBT Test, Collins, 2012 edition
4 Soft Skills for Everyone by Jeff Butterfield, Cengage Learning, 2010 edition
5 English for Life and the Workplace Through LSRW&T skills, by Dolly John, Pearson Publications,
2014 edition
6 Professional Speaking Skills by Aruna Koneru, Oxford Publications, 2015
E BOOKS
1 https://www.britishcouncil.in/english/courses‐business

2 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/features/pronunciation

3 http://www.bbc.co.uk/learningenglish/english/

4 http://www.antimoon.com/how/pronunc‐soundsipa.htm

5 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/write‐and‐improve/

6 Oneshopenglish.com

7 Breakingnews.com
MOOC
1 https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/english
2 https://www.mooc‐list.com/course/adventures‐writing‐stanford‐online
3 http://www.cambridgeenglish.org/learning‐english/free‐resources/mooc/

61
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND COMPUTER AIDED

COURSE TITLE DESIGN CREDITS 3
(Common to all branches)
COURSE CODE MEA4101 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 1-1-2-1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL 5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to
Understand drafting and computer aided drafting. Remember the commands used 1,2
1
in AutoCAD to generate simple drawings.
Explain details in a drawing and apply the knowledge to solve simple problems 1,2,5
2
involving straight lines, planes and solids
Understand and Visualize solid objects and apply AutoCAD software commands to 1,2,4,5
3
generate the graphic models
4 Apply the 3D model commands to generate and solid object 1,2,5
Apply the viewing AutoCAD commands to generate top view, front view and 1,2,5
5
additional or sectional views.
Student can able to develop any graphical model of geometrical and simple 1,2,5
6
mechanical objects in AutoCAD software.
Prerequisites : Plus Two English‐Intermediate Level
MODULE 1: BASICS OF ENGINEERING GRAPHICS AND PLANE CURVES 12 Hours
Importance of graphics ‐ BIS conventions and specifications ‐ drawing sheet sizes ‐ Lettering –
Dimensioning ‐ Scales. Drafting methods ‐ introduction to Computer Aided Drafting – Computer
Hardware – Workstation – Printer and Plotter – Introduction to software for Computer Aided Design
and Drafting – Exposure to Solid Modelling software – Geometrical Construction‐Coordinate
Systems/Basic Entities – 3D printer.
Self-Study: Solid modelling Software commands
MODULE 2: VISUALIZATION, ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTIONS AND FREE HAND SKETCHING
15 Hours
Visualization concepts and Free Hand sketching: Visualization principles —Representation of Three
Dimensional objects — Pictorial Projection methods ‐ Layout of views‐ Free hand sketching of multiple
views from pictorial views of objects. Drafting of simple Geometric Objects/Editing
General principles of presentation of technical drawings as per BIS ‐ Introduction to Orthographic
projections ‐ Naming views as per BIS ‐ First angle projection method. Conversion to orthographic
views from given pictorial views of objects, including dimensioning – Drafting of Orthographic views
from Pictorial views.
Self-study: CAD software commands for sketching a drawing
MODULE 3: GEOMETRICAL MODELING ISOMETRIC VIEWS AND DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES
15 Hours
Principles of isometric projection and solid modelling. Isometric drawing ‐ IsoPlanes and 3D Modelling
commands. Projections of Principal Views from 3‐D Models. Solid Modeling – Types of modelling ‐

62
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Wire frame model, Surface Model and Solid Model – Introduction to graphic software for solid
modelling. Development of Surfaces.
Self-study: surface modelling and solid modelling commands
MODULE 4: COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING 15 Hours
Preparation of solid models of machine components like slide block, solid bearing block, bushed
bearing, gland, wall bracket, guide bracket, shaft bracket, jig plate, shaft support (open type),
vertical shaft support etc using appropriate modelling software.
2D views and sectional view, computer aided drafting and dimensioning. Generate 2D drawing from
the 3D models – generate and develop the lateral surfaces of the objects. Presentation Techniques
of Engineering Drawings – Title Blocks – Printing/Plotting the 2D/3D drawing using printer and
printing solid object using 3D printer.
Self-study: CAD commands for modelling and views generation
MODULE 5: SIMPLE DESIGN PROJECTS - COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND DRAFTING 15 Hours
Creation of engineering models and their presentation in standard 2D form, 3D Wire‐Frame and
shaded solids, meshed topologies for engineering analysis, tool‐path generation for component
manufacture, geometric dimensioning and tolerancing. Use of solid‐modelling software for creating
associative models at the components and assembly levels in their respective branch of engineering
like building floor plans that include: windows, doors, fixtures such as WC, Sink, shower, slide block,
etc. Applying colour coding according to drawing practice.
Self-study: CAD commands for modelling and views generation
TEXT BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T, Engineering Drawing and Graphics Using AutoCAD, 7th Edition, Vikas Publishing
House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Introduction to AutoCAD – 2D and 3D Design, A.Yarmwood, Newnes
2 Engineering Drawing and Graphic Technology‐International Edition, Thomas E.
3 Engineering Drawing and Design, Sixth Edition, C. Jensen, J.D. Helsel, D.R.
4 Technical Drawing‐Fourteenth Edition, F. E. Giesecke, A. Mitchell, H. C.
5 Bhatt N.D and Panchal V.M, Engineering Drawing: Plane and Solid Geometry,
6 Warren J. Luzadder and Jon. M. Duff, Fundamentals of Engineering Drawing,
E BOOKS
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐j‐benjamin‐
1
pentex‐free‐ebook‐pdf‐download.html
http://keralatechnologicaluniversity.blogspot.in/2015/06/engineering‐graphics‐p‐i‐
2
varghese.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103019/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/105104148/
TUTORIAL LINK
1 https://www.jeyapoovan.com
2 Mechanical Engineering Drawing‐Self Taught, Jashua Rose,
http://www.gutenberg.org/files/23319/23319‐h/23319‐h.html

63
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING AND DESIGN CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECB4101 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 60% ESE 40%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Students will be able to appreciate the different elements involved in good designs
1 1,2,5
and to apply them in practice when called for.
Students will be aware of the product oriented and user oriented aspects that 1,2,5
2
make the design a success.
Students Will be capable to think of innovative designs incorporating different 1,2,5
3
segments of knowledge gained in the course
Students will have a broader perspective of design covering function, cost, 1,2,5
4 environmental sensitivity, safety and other factors other than engineering
analysis.
5 Students learn economic and environmental Issues, trade aspects and IPR 1,2,5
Prerequisites : NIL
MODULE 1:INTRODUCTION TO ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN (7+2 PERIODS)
Design and its objectives; Design constraints, Design functions, Design means and Design from; Role
of Science, Engineering and Technology in design; Engineering as a business proposition; Functional
and Strength Designs. Design form, function and strength; How to initiate creative designs? Initiating
the thinking process for designing a product of daily use. Need identification; Problem Statement;
Market survey‐customer requirements; Design attributes and objectives; Ideation; Brain storming
approaches; arriving at solutions; Closing on to the Design needs.
Project: An Exercise in the process of design initiation. A simple problem is to be taken up to examine
different solutions‐ Ceiling fan? Group Presentation and discussion.
MODULE 2: ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN PROCESS (7+2 PERIODS)
Design process‐ Different stages in design and their significance; Defining the design space;
Analogies and “thinking outside of the box”; Quality function deployment‐meeting what the
customer wants; Evaluation and choosing of a design. Design Communication; Realization of the
concept into a configuration, drawing and model. Concept of “Complex is Simple”. Design for
function and strength.
Design detailing‐ Material selection, Design visualization‐ Solid modelling; Detailed 2D drawings;
Tolerance; Use of standard items in design; Research needs in design; Energy needs of the design,
both in its realization and in the applications.
Project:An exercise in the detailed design of any two electronics products
MODULE 3: PROTOTYPING IN ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING (4+5 PERIODS)
Prototyping‐ rapid prototyping; testing and evaluation of design; Design modifications; Freezing the
design; Cost analysis.
Engineering the design – From prototype to product. Planning; Scheduling; Supply chains; inventory;
handling; manufacturing/construction operations; storage; packaging; shipping; marketing; feed‐back
on design
Project: List out the standards organizations. Prepare a list of standard items used in any Electronics
engineering specialization. Develop any design with over 50% standard items as parts

64
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 4: QUALITY ASPECTS FOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DESIGN (4+5 PERIODS)

Design for “X”; covering quality, reliability, safety, manufacturing/construction, assembly,
maintenance, logistics, handling; disassembly; recycling; re‐engineering etc.
Project:Example:List out the design requirements(x) for designing a rocket shell of 3‐meter diameter
and 8‐meter length. Design mineral water bottles that could be packed compactly for transportation.
Module 5: USER CENTERED DESIGNS FOR ELECTRONIC SYSTEM (4+5 PERIODS)
Product centered and user centered design. Product centered attributes and user centered
attributes. Bringing the two closer. Example: Smart phone. Aesthetics and ergonomics. Value
engineering, Concurrent engineering, Reverse engineering in design; Culture based design;
Architectural designs; Motifs and cultural background; Tradition and design; Study the evolution of
Wet grinders; Printed motifs; Role of colours in design. Make sharp corners and change them to
smooth curves‐check the acceptance. Design as a marketing tool; Intellectual Property rights – Trade
secret; patent; copy‐right; trademarks; product liability. Group presentation of any such products
covering all aspects that could make or mar it.

Project: Examine the possibility of value addition for an existing product.

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Balmer, R. T., Keat, W. D., Wise, G., and Kosky, P., Exploring Engineering, Third Edition: An
Introduction to Engineering and Design ‐ [Part 3 ‐ Chapters 17 to 27], ISBN13: 978‐0124158917
ISBN‐10: 0124158919
2 Dym, C. L., Little, P. and Orwin, E. J., Engineering Design ‐ A Project based introduction ‐ Wiley,
ISBN‐978‐1‐118‐32458‐5
3 Eastman, C. M. (Ed.), Design for X Concurrent engineering imperatives, 1996, XI, 489 p. ISBN 978‐
94‐011‐3985‐4 Springer
4 Haik, Y. And Shahin, M. T., Engineering Design Process, Cengage Learning, ISBN‐13: 978‐0‐495‐
66816‐9
5 Pahl, G., Beitz, W., Feldhusen, J. and Grote, K. H., Engineering Design: A Systematic
Approach, 3rd ed. 2007, XXI, 617p., ISBN 978‐1‐84628‐319‐2
6 Voland, G., Engineering by Design, ISBN 978‐93‐325‐3505‐3, Pearson India

65
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4116 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
To analyze and reduce the given logical expressions using Boolean algebra also
1 1,2,3,4
by algorithmic methods
To design the combinational logic circuits of basic and specified problem
2 1,2,3,4
statement
3 To design and analyze the function of specified sequential logic circuits 1,2,3,4
4 To implement the logic functions using Programmable devices 1,2,3,4,5
5 To Use VHDL for digital logic design and simulation 1,2,3,4,5
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1 – BOOLEAN ALGEBRA & ITS SIMPLIFICATION TECHNIQUES (9L+3T)
Binary arithmetic – Logic Gates – Minimization of POS and SOP Reduction of switching equations using
Boolean algebra, Realization of switching function. DE Morgan’s Theorem. Karnaugh map
simplification method (up to 4 variables) – Advantages and Limitations – Quine McClusky’s method.
Suggested reading‐ Computational efficiency and cost requirement of circuits using various codes.
MODULE 2 – DESIGN OF BASIC COMBINATIONAL CIRCUITS (9L+3T)
Adders – Subtractors – Binary parallel adders, Parallel subtractors, Parallel adder/ subtractors, Binary
decoders and encoders – Priority encoders – Multiplexers – MUX as universal combinational modules
– De‐multiplexers.
Suggested reading‐ Advanced arithmetic (data manipulation) circuit to reduce delay and cost.
MODULE 3 – FUNCTIONAL AND DESIGN ANALYSIS OF SEQUENTIAL CIRCUITS (9L+3T)
Flip flops – SR, JK, D and T flip flops, Master – Slave flip flops, Characteristic and excitation table –
Shift registers – Counters – Synchronous and Asynchronous counters – Modulus counters, Up/Down
counters – State diagram, State table, State minimization techniques‐ Design of synchronous
sequential circuits.
Suggested reading‐ Asynchronous digital circuit design methods and its challenges.
MODULE 4 – SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY AND PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES (9L+3T)
Semiconductor memories‐ Classification of memories –Programmable Logic Devices –Logic
Implementation with Programmable Logic Array (PLA), Programmable Array Logic (PAL) – concept of
Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGA).
TTL, ECL and CMOS logic family concepts and their characteristics
Suggested reading‐ Advanced materials and their characteristics used for memory construction.
MODULE 5 – DESIGN TECHNIQUES USING VHDL LANGUAGE (9L+3T)
Introduction to Hardware description languages‐ Data types and objects‐ operators‐ type of delays‐
Entity and Architectural declaration‐ VHDL Modelling styles – Dataflow, Structural and Behavioral
models for basic combinational circuits.

66
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1 Morris Mano, “Digital design”, 5 th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2012
2 Anil K. Maini, “Digital Electronics: Principles, Devices and Applications”, Willey, 2007
3 Charles Roth, “ Digital System Design using VHDL” ,Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Milos Ercegovac, Jomas Lang, “Introduction to Digital Systems”, Wiley publications, 1998.
2 John M. Yarbrough, “Digital logic: Applications and Design”, Thomas – Vikas Publishing House,
2002.
3 R.P.Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”,4th Edition, TMH, 2010.
4 William H. Gothmann, “ Digital Electronics‐ An introduction to theory and practice” , PHI, 2nd
edition ,2006.
E BOOKS
1 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/264005171_Digital_Electronics

2 http://free‐ebook‐download‐links.blogspot.in/2008/08/free‐books‐on‐digital‐electronics.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106086/1
2 https://www.openlearning.com/courses/SKEE1223x

COURSE TITLE NETWORK THEORY CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4117 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
To apply various circuit laws like Ohm’s Law, KVL, KCL, node and mesh circuit
1 1,2
analysis and network theorems.
2 To analyze behavior of passive circuits such as RC, RL and RLC. 1,2
3 To apply Laplace Transform for circuit analysis. 1,2
To calculate two port parameters such as y, z, h, ABCD, etc. for the given two
4 1,2
port network.
5 To understand basics of network synthesis from the transfer function. 1,2
Prerequisites : Trigonometric formulae, Methods of differentiation, Methods of integration, Partial
Fractions, Matrices, Laplace Transforms.
MODULE 1 – CIRCUIT ANALYSIS & THEOREMS (9L+3T)
Kirchoff’s current and voltage laws – Nodal and Mesh analysis ‐ series and parallel connection of
independent sources – R, L and C – Network Theorems – Thevenin, Superposition, Norton, Maximum
power transfer and duality – Star‐delta conversion

67
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 2 – RESONANCE AND COUPLED CIRCUITS (9L+3T)

Series and parallel resonance – their frequency response – Quality factor and Bandwidth ‐ Self and
mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – Tuned circuits – Single tuned circuits.
MODULE 3 – TRANSIENT RESPONSE FOR DC & AC CIRCUITS (9L+3T)
Transient response of RL, RC and RLC Circuits using Laplace transform for DC input and A.C. with
sinusoidal input
MODULE 4 – TWO –PORT NETWORKS (9L+3T)
One port networks – Two port admittance Parameters (Y parameters) – Admittance parameters
analysis of terminated Two Port networks ‐ Two port impedance Parameters (z‐parameters) –
Impedance and Gain calculations of terminated Two Port networks modelled by z‐parameters –
Hybrid parameters (h‐ para)– Inverse Hybrid Parameters (g‐para)‐ Transmission parameters (ABCD
parameters) ‐ Various Combinations of Two port N/W.
MODULE 5 – INTRODUCTION TO PASSIVE NETWORK SYNTHESIS (9L+3T)
Introduction of Hurwitz Polynomial, Positive Real Function (PRF), Elementary Synthesis Procedure,
Introduction to band pass, low pass, high pass and band reject filters.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Network Analysis & Synthesis By Franklin S. KUO, Wiley Publication, 2006.
2 Network Analysis :‐ By M.E Van Valkenburg PHI Publication, 2016.
3 Engineering Circuit Analysis : ‐ By W H Hayt, J E Kemmerly, S M Durbin 6th Edition TMH
Publication, 2002.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Electric Circuits and Networks :‐ By K. S. Suresh Kumar – Pearson Education, 2009.
2 Linear Circuits Analysis 2nd edition :‐By DeCarlo/ Lin – Oxford University Press(Indian edition),
2001.
3 Electric Circuit Analysis By S N Sivanandam, Vikas Publishing House Introductory Circuit Analysis
by Robert Boylestad, Pearson, 2004.
E BOOKS
1 http://engineeronadisk.com/
2 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 www.nptel.ac.in,
2 www.allaboutcircuits.com

68
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SUSTAINABLE ENGINEERING SYSTEMS

COURSE TITLE CREDITS 2
(Common to ALL Branches of Engineering)
COURSE CODE GEA4102 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING
BTL-3
LEVEL
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Students learn the principles of sustainability with case studies. 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
Students will be able to understand assessing technologies and their 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
2
impact on environment.
To learn the concept of Green Engineering and to apply in their 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
3
projects at higher semesters.
Management of natural resources and waste management from 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
4
various types of industries.
5 Students learn water technology and behavioral aspects of humans. 2,3,6,7,8,9,10,12
Prerequisites : Knowledge in fundamentals of chemistry at higher secondary level
MODULE 1 – PRINCIPLES OF SUSTAINABLE SYSTEMS (5L)
Sustainability Definitions ‐ Principles of Sustainable Design, Sustainable Engineering ‐Frameworks for
Applying Sustainability Principles ‐ Summary & Activities.
MODULE 2 – TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT AND LIFECYCLE ASSESSMENT (5L)
Technology as a part of anthropogenic environment ‐ Technology readiness levels (TRL) – technical
metrics ‐ Emerging, converging, disruptive technologies ‐ Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) methodology ‐
Summary & Activities.
MODULE 3 – GREEN ENGINEERING (5L)
Principles of Green Engineering ‐ Frameworks for assessment of alternatives ‐ Green Engineering
examples ‐ Multifunctional Materials and Their Impact on Sustainability ‐ Summary & Activities.
MODULE 4 – RESOURCE MANAGEMENT TECHNOLOGIES (5L)
Waste management purpose and strategies ‐ Recycling: open‐loop versus closed‐loop thinking ‐
Recycling efficiency ‐ Management of food waste and composting technologies ‐ E‐waste
stream management ‐ Reuse and redistribution programs ‐ LCA approach to waste management
systems ‐ Summary and Activities.
MODULE 5 – SUSTAINABLE WATER AND WASTEWATER SYSTEMS (5L)
Water cycle ‐ Water conservation and protection technologies ‐ Water treatment systems Metrics
for assessment of water management technologies ‐ Summary & Activities.
MODULE 6 - BEHAVIORAL ASPECTS AND FEEDBACKS (5L)
Collaborative Decision Making ‐ Role of Community and Social Networking ‐ Human Factor in
Sustainability Paradigm ‐ Summary & Activities.

69
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1 Vanek, F.M., and L.D. Albright, Energy Systems Engineering. Evaluation and Implementation,
McGraw Hill, 2008.
2 C.U. Becker, Sustainability Ethics and Sustainability Research, Springer 2012.
3 J.B. Guinee et al., Life Cycle Assessment: Past, Present, and Future, Environ. Sci. Technol., 2011,
45, 90‐96.
4 Anastas, P.T., Zimmerman, J.B., Innovations in Green Chemistry and Green Engineering, Springer
2013.
5 Solid Waste Technology & Management, Volume 1 & 2, Christensen, T., Ed., Wiley and Sons.,
2010.
6 Sterman, J.D., in Sustainability Science: The Emerging Paradigm, Weinstein, M.P. and Turner, R.E.
(Eds.), Springer Science+Business Media, LLC 2012.
E BOOKS
David T. Allen, David R. Shonnard, Sustainable Engineering Concepts, Design and Case Studies,
1
Pearson Education, December 2011. (ISBN: 9780132756587)
Gerald Jonker Jan Harmsen, Engineering for Sustainability 1st Edition, A Practical Guide for
2
Sustainable Design, Elsvier 2012. (ISBN: 9780444538475).
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/sustainability
2 https://www.academiccourses.com/Certificate/Sustainability‐Studies/India/
3 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ce08/preview
4 https://www.coursera.org/learn/ecosystem‐services

70
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SYSTEM DESIGN LAB CREDIT 1

COURSE CODE ECB4141 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Design and implement basic and other stated combinational logic circuits. 1,2,3,5
2 Design and implement basic and other stated sequential logic circuits. 1,2,3,5
3 Design and Simulate basic Combinational logic circuits using VHDL language 1,2,3,5
Prerequisites: Nil
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING DIGITAL GATES AND ICS
1. Design and implementation of Adders and Subtractors using logic gates.
2. Design and implementation of 4 bit binary Adder/ subtractor and BCD adder using IC
7483
3. Design and implementation of code converters using logic gates
(i) BCD to excess‐3 code and vice versa
(ii) Binary to gray and vice‐versa
4. Design and implementation of 2Bit Magnitude Comparator using logic gates
and 8 Bit Magnitude Comparator using IC 7485
5. Design and implementation of Multiplexer and De‐multiplexer using logic
Gates
6. Design and implementation of encoder and decoder using logic gates
7. Construction and verification of 4 bit ripple counter and Mod‐10 counters
8. Design and implementation of 3‐bit synchronous up/down counter
9. Design and Verification of truth table of Master slave JK flip flop.
10. Design of Asynchronous up Counter.(MOD‐6)
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING VHDL LANGUAGE
1. Design of Adders and Subtractors using VHDL
2. Design of Multiplexers and De‐Multiplexers using VHDL
3. Design of 4 bit Ripple Counter and MOD 10 Counter using VHDL.
REFERENCE
1 L K Maheswari and M M S Anand, “Laboratory Manual for Introductory Electronic Experiments”,
New Age, 2010.
2 S Poornachandra Rao and B Sasikala, “Handbook of Experiments in Electronics and
Communication Engineering”,Vikas publishers, 2003.
MOOC
1 http://ozark.hendrix.edu/~burch/logisim/
2 http://www.cadence.com/products/orcad/pspice_simulation/pages/default.ap
3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐111‐introductory‐
digital‐systems‐laboratory‐spring‐2006/
4 https://epd.sutd.edu.sg/undergraduate‐courses/30110‐digital‐systems‐laboratory/

71
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB CREDIT 1

COURSE CODE GEA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-2
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Upon successful completion of this course the student should be able to Identify
1 and use of tools, Types of joints used in welding, carpentry and plumbing 1,2,4,6,12
operations.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques such as carpentry and
2 1,2,4,6,12
plumbing practices.
Have hands on experience on basic fabrication techniques of different types of
3 1,2,4,6,12
welding and basic machining practices.
SLOT X - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
I. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP
5.Welding: Arc welding: Butt joints
6.Lap joints.
7.Machining: Facing
8.Turning
II. AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
5. Dismantling and Studying of two stroke gasoline engine.
6. Assembling of two stroke gasoline engine.
7. Dismantling and Studying of four stroke gasoline engine
8. Assembling of four stroke gasoline engine.
III. AERONAUTICAL ENGINEERING
5. Study of Flow Pattern around Various Objects.
6. Force measurement on Aircraft Model
7. Determination of Young's Modulus for Aluminum Cantilever Beam
8. Binary Addition & Subtraction using Microprocessor
IV. CIVIL ENGINEERING
5. Plumbing‐ Basic Pipe Connection using valves, couplings and elbows.
6. Carpentry – Sowing, Planning and making common Joints.
7. Bar Bending
8. Construction of a 50 cm height brick wall without mortar using English Bond.
SLOT Y - LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
V.ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
5. Study of tools and accessories.
6. Study of cables.
7. Staircase wiring, Tube light and Fan connection.
8. Measurement of energy using single phase energy meter.
VI. ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
5. Study of Active and Passive Components.
6. Study of Logic Circuits.
7. Making simple circuit using Electronic Components.
8. Measuring of parameters for signal using CRO.

72
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

VII. COMPUTER SCIENCE

5. Troubleshooting different parts of the computer peripherals, Monitor, Keyboard & CPU.
6. Installation of various operating systems, their capabilities, Windows, Unix, Linux.
7. Installation of commonly used software like MS Office
8. Assembling digital computer.
VIII. MECHATRONICS ENGINEERING
5. Study of Key Elements of Mechatronics Systems
6. Sensors – Load Cell, Thermocouple
7. Actuators – Linear & Rotary Actuators
8. Interfacing & Measurements – Virtual Instrumentation
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jeyapoovan T and Saravanapandian M., Engineering practices lab manual, 4th Edition, Vikas
publishing House, New Delhi, 2015.
2 Hajra Choudhury S.K., Hajra Choudhury A.K. and Nirjhar Roy S.K., “Elements of Workshop
Technology”, Vol. I 2008 and Vol. II 2010, Media promoters and publishers private limited,
Mumbai.
3 Ibrahim Zeid, CAD/CAM Theory and Practice, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New
Delhi, 2011
4 Robert Quesada, Jeyapoovan T., Computer Numerical Control Machining and Turning Centers,
Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2006
METHOD OF ALLOCATION FOR ENGINEERING IMMERSION LAB
SLOT X : MECH, AERO, AUTO, CIVIL EXPERIMENTS
SLOT Y : EEE, ELECTRONICS, CSE, MECHATRONICS EXPERIMENTS
 EVERY CLASS OF
 GROUP A (AERO, AUTO, MECH, MCT, CHEM, BIO, CIVIL
 GROUP B (CSE, IT, ECE, EEE, AEROSPACE)
GETS DIVIDED INTO 4 SUB ‐ GROUPS NAMELY a, b, c, d ‐‐ EACH CONSISTING OF 15 TO 20 STUDENTS
MAX.
 FOR EXAMPLE: GROUP A STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT X
 WEEK 1 : SLOT X ‐‐‐
 a – MECH; b – AUTO; c – AERO ; d – CIVIL
 WEEK 2 : SLOT X ‐‐‐
 b – MECH; c – AUTO; d – AERO ; a – CIVIL
 THE ABOVE SCHEDULE WILL BE ON ROTATION EVERY MONTH (ONE CYLCE PER MONTH)
 GROUP B STUDENTS WILL OCCUPY SLOT Y
 WEEK 1 : SLOT Y ‐‐‐
 a – EEE; b – ECE; c – CSE ; d – MCT
 WEEK 2 : SLOT Y ‐‐‐
 b – EEE; c – ECE; d – CSE ; a – MCT
 THE ABOVE SCHEDULE WILL BE ON ROTATION EVERY MONTH (ONE CYLCE PER MONTH)

73
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

(Common to all engineering branches) CREDIT 1

COURSE CODE PHA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0

CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL 3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Ability to analyze material’s elastic properties 1, 2
2 Ability to determine thermal conductivity of bad conductor 1, 2

3 Ability to measure coefficient of viscosity of liquids 1, 2

4 Ability to determine wavelength of laser 1, 2
5 Ability to describe V‐I characteristics of diode 1, 2
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic physics practical at higher secondary level
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (ANY FIVE EXPERIMENTS)
1. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of rigidity modulus of the material of a wire.
2. Non Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
3. Uniform Bending – Determination of Young’s Modulus.
4. Viscosity – Determination of co‐efficient of viscosity of a liquid by Poiseuille’s flow.
5. Lee’s Disc – Determination of thermal conductivity of a bad conductor.
6. Air – Wedge – Determination of thickness of a thin wire
7. Spectrometer – refractive index of a prism
8. Semiconductor laser – Determination of wavelength of laser using grating
9. Semiconductor diode – VI characteristics
TEXT BOOKS
1 P. Mani, engineering Physics Practicals, Dhanam Publications, Chennai, 2005
REFERENCE
1 Glenn V.Lo, Jesus Urrechaga ‐ Aituna, Introductory Physics Laboratory Manual, Part‐I, Fall 2005
Edition.
2 P. Kulkarni, Experiments in Engineering Physics Bachelor of Engineering and Technology, Edition
2015
E BOOK
1 http://www.aurora.ac.in/images/pdf/departments/humanities‐and‐sciences/engg‐phy‐lab‐
manual.pdf

74
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE MATERIALS CHEMISTRY LAB

CREDIT 1
(Common to ALL branches of Engineering)
COURSE CODE CYA4131 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Students learn to characterize basic properties of refractory ceramics 1,2,3
2 On completion of this course, students learn to prepare resins and composites. 1,2,3
Students learn to estimate metal ions present in samples using instrumental 1,2,3
3
techniques.
4 On completion of the course the students learn to develop adsorption isotherm. 1,2,3
5 Students learn to find properties of lubricants and other oil samples. 1,2,3
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basic chemistry practical at higher secondary level.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
1. Construction of Phenol‐Water Phase diagram.
2. Determination of viscosity of polymer using Ostwald Viscometer.
3. Preparation of urea‐formaldehyde resin.
4. Determination of porosity of a refractory.
5. Determination of Apparent Density of porous solids.
6. Determination of Viscosity Index of lubricants.
7. Estimation of dye content in the effluent by UV‐Visible spectrophotometry.
8. Determination of viscosity of oil using Red‐Wood Viscometer.
9. Determination of Copper / iron content in the alloy by colorimetry.
10. Estimation of sodium and potassium ions by Flame Photometry.
11. Verification of Beer‐Lambert’s law using gold nanoparticles.
12. Determination of adsorption isotherm for acetic acid on activated charcoal.
REFERENCE
1 J. Mendham, R.C. Denney, J.D. Barnes and N.J.K. Thomas, Vogel’s Textbook of Quantitative
Chemical Analysis, 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2009
2 D.P. Shoemaker and C.W. Garland, Experiments in Physical Chemistry, 8th edition, McGraw Hill,
London, 2008
3 S. Sumathi, Laboratory work book for Engineering Chemistry Practical, 2015
4 Laboratory Manual of Testing Materials, William Kendrick Hatt and Herbert Henry Scofield,
Andesite Press, 2017
E BOOKS
1 http://www.erforum.net/2016/01/engineering‐chemistry‐by‐jain‐and‐jain‐pdf‐free‐ebook.html
MOOC
1 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/chemistry/5‐111‐principles‐of‐chemical‐science‐fall‐2008/video‐
lectures/lecture‐32/
2 https://www.coursetalk.com/providers/coursera/courses/introduction‐to‐chemistry‐1

75
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – III

PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS AND TRANSFORMS

COURSE TITLE CREDITS
(COMMON FOR ALL DEPARTMENT) 4
COURSE CODE MAA4201 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL:1-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to formulate and solve some of the physical problems involving partial 1,2,3
differential equations
2. Skilled to classify and solve the Wave and Heat equations 1,2,3,4
3. Able to classify and solve two dimensional heat equations. 1,2,3,4
4. Able to solve problems related to engineering applications by using Fourier 1,2,3,4,5
Transform techniques.
5. Able to understand the discrete transform applied to engineering problems. 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS (9L+3T)
Formation of partial differential equations by elimination of arbitrary constants, arbitrary functions –
Solution of standard types of first order partial differential equations – Lagrange’s linear equation – Linear
partial differential equations of second order with constant coefficients.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differentiation
MODULE 2: ONE DIMENSIONAL WAVE AND HEAT FLOW EQUATION (9L+3T)
Classification of second order linear partial differential equations – Solutions of one dimensional wave
equation (without proof) – One dimensional heat flow equation (without proof) and application in string
and rod problems.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differential Equations, Half range sine series.
MODULE 3: TWO DIMENSIONAL HEAT FLOW EQUATION (9L+3T)
Steady state solution of two dimensional heat equations and applications in finite plates and infinite
plates problems.
Suggested Reading: Partial Differential Equations, Half range sine series.
MODULE 4: FOURIER TRANSFORM (9L+3T)
Fourier Integral Theorem (without proof) – Fourier transform pair – Sine and Cosine transforms –
Properties – Transforms of Simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s identity.
Suggested Reading: Basic integration.
MODULE 5: Z-TRANSFORM AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS (9L+3T)
Z‐Transform – Elementary Properties – Inverse Z‐Transform – Convolution theorem – Formation of
Difference equations – Solution of difference equations using Z‐Transform
Suggested Reading: Basic calculus

76
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB/MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Theory with practical classes
TEXT BOOKS
1. ` P. Sivarama Krishna Das, C. Vijayakumari., “Transforms and partial differential equations”,
Pearson Publication, 2016.
2. Grewal. B.S., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 2012.
3. Chandrasekaran A, “A Text Book of Transforms and Partial Differential Equations”, Dhanam
Publication, 2015
4. Raj Kumar Bansal,Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications in
Engineering”, Pearson Publication, Second Edition, 2016.
REFRENCE BOOKS
1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Laxmi
Publications Pvt Ltd , 2007.
2. Datta.K.B., "Mathematical Methods of Science and Engineering", Cengage Learning India Pvt
Ltd, Delhi, 2013.
3. Veerarajan. T., "Transforms and Partial Differential Equations", Tata McGraw Hill Education
Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, Second reprint, 2012.
4. Dean G. Duffy., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Third Edition
2013.
E BOOKS
1 nptel.ac.in/courses/122107037/
2 nptel.ac.in/courses/122107037/22
MOOC
1. https://www.mooc‐list.com/tags/laplace‐transforms
2. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐differential‐equations‐bux‐math226‐1x‐1

77
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ANALOG ELECTRONICS CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4201 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
To expose the students to study the different biasing and
1. 1,2,3,4
configurations of the amplifier circuits.
To study the characteristics of tuned amplifier and feedback
2. 1,2,3,4,5
Amplifiers
To expose the students to various amplifiers oscillator circuits with
3. 1,2,3,4,5
feedback concepts

4. To learn the wave shaping process and circuits. 1,2,3,4,5

To study the characteristics of linear Op‐Amps and its applications

5. 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
and special ICs
Prerequisites: Engineering Physics
MODULE 1 – SMALL SIGNAL AND LARGE SIGNAL AMPLIFIERS (12L)
Fixed and self‐biasing of BJT & FET – Small signal analysis of CE, CC & Common source amplifiers –
Cascade and Darlington connections, transformer coupled class A, B & AB amplifiers – Push‐pull
amplifiers.
MODULE 2 FEEDBACK AND TUNED AMPLIFIERS (12L)
Characteristics of negative feedback amplifiers – Voltage / current, series/shunt feedback ‐
Characteristics of tuned amplifiers – Single & double tuned amplifier, Stagger tuned and
Synchronized tuned amplifiers and Neutralization Techniques.
MODULE 3 – LINEAR OP-APMPs AND ITS APPLICATIONS (12L)
Linear Circuits using operational amplifiers and their analysis, Inverting and Non inverting
Amplifiers, Differentiator, Integrator, Voltage to current converter, Instrumentation amplifier, Low‐
pass and band‐pass filters, Comparator, , Triangular wave generator, Precision rectifier, Log and
Antilog amplifiers, Non‐linear function generator.

MODULE 4 – WAVE GENEATION AND WAVE SHAPING CIRCUITS (12L)

Theory of sinusoidal oscillators – RC Phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators using Op‐Amps –
Comparators, Multivibrators :Monostable, Astable Multivibrators– Schmitt triggers, Triangular
wave generator, Non‐linear function generator

MODULE 5 – D/A AND A/D CONVERTORS AND SPECIAL ICs (12L)

Introduction, Basic DAC techniques, Weighted resistor DAC, R‐2R ladder DAC, Inverted R‐2R DAC,
Different types of ADCs ‐ Flash ADC, Counter type ADC, Successive approximation ADC and Dual
slope ADC.
PLL,VCO, Astable and Monostable Multivibrators using 555 Timer, Voltage regulators.

78
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Design a feedback and tuned amplifier circuit using BJT for a given frequency
TEXT BOOKS
1. Robert. L. Boylsted and Louis Nashelsky, "Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
Education, 9th edition, 2009.
2. Adel .S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits”, 6th Edition, Oxford University
Press, 2010.
3. David A Bell, “Solid State Pulse Circuits", Oxford University Press, 2007
4. D. Roy Choudhury & Shail B. Jain, 'Linear Integrated Circuits', New Age International
Publishers, Fourth Edition, 2010.
5 Ramakant A. Gayakwad, 'Op‐Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits', Prentice Hall of India,
FourthEdition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jacob Millman, Christos C Halkias, Satyabrata Jit "Electron Devices and Circuits", Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rd edition 2010
2 Donald .A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design –2nd Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
2009.
3 Thomas L. Floyd, "Electronic Devices", 9th edition, Pearson education, 2011.
4 David A. Bell,” Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford Higher Education Press, 5th Edition,
2010.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.qiau.ac.ir/teacher/files/24955/27‐06‐1387‐13‐58‐57‐Wiley%20‐
%20Fundamentals%20of%20Microelectronics%20%28Razavi,%202006%29.pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106062/
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐012‐
microelectronic‐devices‐and‐circuits‐spring‐2009/

79
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS AND WAVES CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4202 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-2
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to apply basic electrostatic and magneto static laws 1,2,3,4
2. Able to analyze time varying fields 1,2,3,4,5,6
Able to apply Maxwell’s equations and wave equation in various
3. 1,2,3,4,5,6
conditions
Able to analyze electromagnetic wave propagations through parallel
4. 1,2,3,4,5
plane guides
Able to analyze electromagnetic wave propagations through rectangular
5. 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
and circular waveguides
Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics & Applied Mathematics
MODULE 1 – VECTOR ANALYSIS (4L+3T)
Coordinate Systems: Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical co‐ordinate systems, Vector Calculus:
differential lengths, surfaces and volumes in Cartesian, cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems,
del operator, gradient, divergence and curl.
Suggested Reading: Vector algebra: Scalars and Vectors, Unit Vector, Vector Addition and
Subtraction, Position and Distance Vectors, Vector Multiplication.
MODULE 2 – ELECTROSTATICS AND STATIC MAGNETIC FIELDS (12L+3T)
Coulomb’s law, electric field intensity, field due to point charge, field due to line charge, field due
to sheet of charge, electric flux density, Gauss’s law, applications of Gauss’s law, divergence
theorem, potential difference and potential gradient, electric dipole and dipole moment.
Biot‐Savart’s law, Ampere’s circuital law and applications, Stokes theorem, Magnetic flux and
magnetic flux density, Scalar and Vector magnetic potential, Force on a moving charge (Lorentz’s
force equation), Force on a differential current element, Force and Torque on a closed circuit.
Suggested Reading: Field streamlines, superposition theorem.
Force between differential current elements, magnetic dipole moment.
MODULE 3 – TIME VARYING FIELDS AND WAVES (12 L+3T)
Faraday’s law, displacement current, ampere’s circuital law for time varying fields, Maxwell’s
equations in phasor form, differential and integral form, wave propagation in free space, Helmholtz
equation, uniform plane wave, pointing vector and the flow of power.
Wave Propagation in Lossy Dielectrics, Plane Waves in Lossless Dielectrics, Plane Waves in Free
Space, Plane Waves in Good Conductors, skin effect, Wave polarization: linear, elliptical and circular
polarization, Reflection of uniform plane wave: normal and oblique incidence.
Suggested Reading: Transformer and Motional emf, retarded potentials.
MATLAB® programs for computations and animations of EM principles.
Snell’s law, critical and Brewster’s angle, standing waves.
MATLAB® programs for computations and animations of wave propagation.

80
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 4 – GUIDED WAVES (5 L+3T)

Waves between parallel planes of perfect conductors – Transverse electric and transverse magnetic
waves – characteristics of TE and TM Waves – Transverse Electromagnetic waves –Velocities of
propagation – component uniform plane waves between parallel planes – Attenuation of TE and
TM waves in parallel plane guides – Wave impedances.
Suggested Reading: Propagation, attenuation and impedance in parallel planes guides.
MODULE 5 – RECTANGULAR AND CIRCULAR WAVEGUIDES (12 L+3T)
Transverse Magnetic Waves and Transverse Electric Waves in Rectangular Waveguides –
characteristic of TE and TM Waves – Cut off wavelength and phase velocity – Impossibility of TEM
waves in waveguides – Dominant mode in rectangular waveguide –Attenuation of TE and TM
modes in rectangular waveguides – Wave impedances – characteristic impedance – Excitation of
modes.
Bessel functions – Solution of field equations in cylindrical co‐ordinates – TM and TE waves in
circular guides – wave impedances and characteristic impedance – Dominant mode in circular
waveguide – excitation of modes.
Suggested Reading: Propagation, attenuation, excitation and impedances.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Mathew. N. O. Sadiku “ Principles of Electromagnetics”, 6th edition, Oxford university
Press, 2015.
2. William H. Hayt, Jr., John A. Buck, “Engineering Electromagnetics”, 8th edition, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2011.
3. Jorden, Ballman, “Electromagnetic Fields & Radiating Systems”, 2nd edition, Pearson, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. John Kraus, Daniel Fleisch, “Electromagnetics with applications”, 5th edition, McGraw Hill
Education, 2017.
2. David. K. Cheng, “Fields and Wave electromagnetics, 2nd edition, Pearson Education, 2002.
E BOOKS
Constantine Balanis, “Advanced Engineering Electromagnetics”, 2nd edition, John
1.
Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2012.
Sophocles J. Orfanidis, “Electromagnetic Waves and Antennas”, 2016. Web page:
2.
www.ece.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/ewa
3. Robert E. Collin, “Field Theory of Guided Waves”, 2nd edition, Wiley‐IEEE Press, 1990.

MOOC
1. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐013‐
electromagnetics‐and‐applications‐spring‐2009/
2. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108106073/ : Dr.Harishankar Ramachandran, IIT Madras.
3. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101057/40 :
4. www.cdeep.iitb.ac.in/webpage_data/nptel/Electrical%20.../Lec46(m6).html

81
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE PROFESSIONAL ETHICS AND LIFE SKILLS CREDITS 2

COURSE CODE GEA4216 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL- 3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
An understanding of business ethics, levels, myths, use and train oneself to be
1 8,9,10,11
ethical.
2 Knowledge on Ethical principles, reasoning, roles & responsibilities. 8,9,10,11

An understanding of stake holder theory, Individual and corporate responsibilities 8,9,10,11

3
towards stake holders.
Understanding on Corporate responsibilities towards Product Safety & Reliability 8,9,10,11
4
and environment friendly approach.
Understanding between the Employee & Corporate on responsibilities on aspects 8,9,10,11
5
of contracts, equal opportunity , Affirmative action, sexual harassment etc.,
Prerequisites :Nil
MODULE 1: HUMAN VALUES 6 Hours
Definition of ethics‐Morals values and ethics – integrity‐Work ethics‐ Service learning‐Civic virtue‐
Respect for others‐Caring‐Sharing‐Honesty‐Courage‐Valuing time‐Cooperation‐Commitment‐
Empathy‐Self confidence‐Character‐Spirituality‐Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management
Self-Study: Case study of Discovery failure
MODULE 2: ENGINEERING ETHICS 6 Hours
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of
professional roles ‐ Theories about right action – Self‐interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of Ethical
Theories.
Self-study: Study the Bhopal gas tragedy
MODULE 3: SAFETY, REPOSIBILITIES AND RIGHTS 6 Hours
Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk ‐ Respect for
Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime –
Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.
Self-study: Chernobyl explosion, Nuclear and thermal power plant issues
MODULE 4: LIFE SKILLS 6 Hours
Definition, Relevance, Types of values, changing concepts of values‐aims and values of value
education‐ basic etiquette‐morals and values in life‐dealing with people. Personal values – Self –
Strengths (self‐confidence, self‐assessment, self‐reliance, self‐discipline, determination, self‐
restraint, contentment, humility, sympathy and compassion, gratitude, forgiveness) Weaknesses
Self-study: Influences - Peer pressure, familial and societal expectations, media

82
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5: SOCIETIES IN PROGRESS 6 Hours

Definition of society; Units of society; Communities – ancient and modern – Agents of change – Sense
of survival, security, desire for comfort and ease sense of belonging, social consciousness and
responsibility
Self-study: Personal value and professional value of Engineers on societies perception
TEXT BOOKS
1 Subramanian R., Professional ethics, Oxford University press, 2010
2 Manoharan P.K., Education and Personality Development, APH Publishing Corporation, New
Delhi, 2008
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Megan J. Murphy (Editor), Lorna Hecker (Editor), Ethics and Professional Issues in Couple and
Family Therapy
2 Andrew Belsey (Editor), Ruth Chadwick (Editor), Ethical Issues in Journalism and the Media
(Professional Ethics)
3 Warwick Fox (Editor), Ethics and the Built Environment (Professional Ethics)
4 RuchikaNath, Value Education, APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, 2008

COURSE TITLE ANALOG ELECTRONICS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4231 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Design the different biasing configurations of the amplifier circuits
1. 1,2,3,5,6
and obtain their frequency response.
Design and study the characteristics of tuned amplifier and
2. 1,2,3,5,6
feedback Amplifiers.
3. Design various circuits using op‐amps. 1,2,3,5,6
4. Design the wave shaping circuits. 1,2,3,5,6
Prerequisites: NL
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Plot the frequency response of a RC coupled BJT amplifier in common emitter configuration.
Calculate gain & Bandwidth.
2. Power amplifier – Class A & Class B power amplifiers: Efficiency calculations. Cross over distortion
in Class B power amplifiers.
3. Series and shunt feedback amplifiers: Frequency response, input and output impedance
calculation.
4. Frequency response of Single Tuned Amplifier with gain and bandwidth calculations.
5. Inverting & Non‐inverting amplifier, Integrator and Differentiator.
6. Instrumentation amplifier.
7. Low Pass and Bandpass filter design.
8. Phase shift & Wein Bridge Oscillator using op‐amp.
9. Precision half wave and full wave rectifiers.
10. Triangular Wave generator.

83
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

11. Astable and Monostable using IC 555 timer.

12. PLL characteristics and frequency multiplier using PLL.
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Comparison of Three‐Phase Port Types
2. Design & Simulate of AC Cable with Bonded Sheaths
3. Design & Simulate HV Battery Charge/Discharge
4. Design a model of Supercapacitor & its Charging and Discharging Behavior
5. Design a model to control a motor with Controlled PWM Voltage and H‐Bridge blocks
6. Interface Microcontroller with GPIO, ADC and DAC Connections to control DC motor.
7. Design a cascade speed‐control structure for a DC motor and simulate the results.
8. design a model to control the torque in a hybrid excitation synchronous machine (HESM) based
electrical‐traction drive.
9. Transient Analysis of a Linear Circuit
10. Steady‐State Analysis of a Linear Circuit
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
Robert. L. Boylsted and Louis Nashelsky, "Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory”, Pearson
1.
Education, 9th edition, 2009.
Adel S. Sedra, Kenneth C. Smith, “Micro Electronic Circuits”, 6th Edition, Oxford University
2.
Press, 2010.
3. David A Bell, “Solid State Pulse Circuits", Oxford University Press, 2007
D. Roy Choudhury & Shail B. Jain, 'Linear Integrated Circuits', New Age International
4.
Publishers, Fourth Edition, 2010.
Ramakant A. Gayakwad, 'Op‐Amps and Linear Integrated Circuits', Prentice Hall of India,
5
FourthEdition,2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jacob Millman, Christos C Halkias, Satyabrata Jit "Electron Devices and Circuits", Tata
McGraw Hill, 3rd edition 2010
2 Donald .A. Neamen, Electronic Circuit Analysis and Design –2nd Edition, Tata Mc Graw Hill,
2009
3 Thomas L. Floyd, "Electronic Devices", 9th edition, Pearson education, 2011.
4 David A. Bell,”Electronic Devices and Circuits”, Oxford Higher Education Press, 5th Edition,
2010.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.qiau.ac.ir/teacher/files/24955/27‐06‐1387‐13‐58‐57‐Wiley%20‐
%20Fundamentals%20of%20Microelectronics%20%28Razavi,%202006%29.pdf
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/113106062/
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐012‐
microelectronic‐devices‐and‐circuits‐spring‐2009/

84
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE CIRCUITS SIMULATION LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4232 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Design and simulate basic simple circuits using diodes and passive
1. 1,2,3,5,6
elements
2. Design and simulate basic amplifier circuits using BJT and FET 1,2,3,5,6

3. Design and Simulate basic circuits using op‐amp 1,2,3,5,6

Prerequisites: NIL
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

LIST OF SIMULATION EXPERIMENTS USING MULTISIM

1. Verification of Low pass and High pass Filter

2. Verification of Clippers & Clampers
3. Design and Verification of Attenuators
4. Verification of Half–Wave and Full‐Wave Rectifier
5. Design and Verification of Voltage Regulator
6. Frequency Response of CE Amplifier
7. Frequency Response of CS Amplifier
8. Frequency Response of CC Amplifier
9. Design of Wein‐Bridge and RC phase shift Oscillator
10. Design and Verification of Class‐A Power Amplifier
11. Design and Verification of Pre‐emphasis and De‐emphasis circuits
12. Design and Verification of RC coupled amplifier
13. Design and Verification of Differential amplifier
14. Astable Multivibrator using op‐amp
15. Monostable Multivibrator using op‐amp
REFERENCES
1. L K Maheswari and M M S Anand, “Laboratory Manual for Introductory Electronic
Experiments”, New Age, 2010.
2. S Poornachandra Rao and B Sasikala, “Handbook of Experiments in Electronics and
Communication Engineering”,Vikas publishers, 2003.
MOOC
1 http://ozark.hendrix.edu/~burch/logisim/
2 http://www.cadence.com/products/orcad/pspice_simulation/pages/default.ap

85
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT – I CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4233 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant
3. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
application
Prerequisites: EEB4101, EEB4118, ECB4116, ECB4117, ECB4201, ECB4202, MATLAB, MULTISIM
LAB / MINI PROJECT
In this project, each team with maximum of five members is expected to design and develop practical
solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research. Software
usage should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject
in the current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various
applications. At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work
carried out. Assessment is made as follows

Assessment Model: LE
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 20%
Third Review & Demo 35%
Report 15%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%

86
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – IV

RANDOM PROCESS
COURSE TITLE (DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION CREDITS 4
ENGINEERING)
COURSE CODE MAA4218 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL – 4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to understand the concept of Probability and one dimensional random variable 1,2,3
2. To improve the ability to understand the importance of discrete and continuous 1,2,4,5
distributions
3. To explore the random experiments specified by two dimensional random variables 1,2,3,4,
5
4. Able to understand discrete, continuous state and time random processes and their 1,2,3,4
applications in engineering field.
5. Competent to analyze various type of functions covariance functions, 1,2,5
autocorrelation functions, covariance functions with and without spectral
properties in the frequency domain.
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: PROBABILITY AND RANDOM VARIABLES (9L+3T)
Axioms of Probability – Bayes’ Theorem ‐Random variables – Moments – Moment generating functions.
Suggested Reading: Basic Probability
MODULE 2: STANDARD DISTRIBUTIONS (9L+3T)
Binomial, Poisson, Geometric, Uniform, Exponential, Gamma and Normal distributions
Suggested Reading: Discrete and Continuous Functions
MODULE 3: TWO-DIMENSIONAL RANDOM VARIABLES (9L+3T)
Joint distribution – Marginal and conditional distribution – Co‐variance – Correlation and Regression
Suggested Reading: Random Variables
MODULE 4: CLASSIFICATION OF RANDOM PROCESS (9L+3T)
Definition and examples – first order, second order, strictly, wide sense stationary and Ergodic processes
– Markov process – Binomial, Poisson processes.
Suggested Reading: Random Variables
MODULE 5: CORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITIES (9L+3T)
Auto‐correlation – Cross‐correlation – Properties (Statement only) – Power spectral density – Cross
spectral density – Properties (Statement only) – Wiener‐Khinchin relation (Statement only) –
Relationship between power spectrum and cross correlation function.
Suggested Reading: Correlation

87
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB/MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Theory with practical classes
TEXT BOOKS
1. Miller. S.L. and Childers. D.G., "Probability and Random Processes with Applications to Signal
Processing and Communications", Academic Press, 2004.
2. A. Chandrasekaran, G. Kavitha, “Probability, Statistics, Random Processes and
Queuing Theory”, Dhanam Publications, 2014
3. Raj Kumar Bansal, Ashok Kumar Goel, Manoj Kumar Sharma, “MATLAB and its Applications in
Engineering”, Pearson Publication, Second Edition, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Ibe. O.C., "Fundamentals of Applied Probability and Random Processes", Elsevier, 1st Indian
Reprint, 2007.
2. Cooper. G.R., Mc Gillem. C.D., "Probabilistic Methods of Signal and System Analysis", 3rd Indian
Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2012.
3. Dean G. Duffy., “Advanced Engineering Mathematics with MATLAB”, CRC Press, Third Edition
2013.
E BOOKS
1 http.//nptel.ac.in/courses/IITMADRAS/Principles_of_Communication1/Pdfs/1_5.pdf
2 https://www.khanacademy.org
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/introduction‐probability‐science‐mitx‐6‐041x‐2

88
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE TRANSMISSION LINES AND NETWORKS CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4216 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Understand the fundamentals of T and Pi networks 1,2,3
2. Understand the fundamentals of passive filters 1,2,3,4,5
3. Understand the fundamentals of attenuators and equalizers 1,2,3,4
4. Able to apply transmission line theory to solve problems 1,2,3,4
5. Able to apply Smith Chart for transmission line problems 1,2,3,5,6,12
Prerequisites:
Calculations pertaining to electromagnetic fields, lay a strong foundation on the theory of
transmission lines and wave guides by highlighting their applications.
MODULE 1 – SYMMETRICAL & ASYMMETRICAL NETWORKS (9L+3T)
Symmetrical networks, characteristic impedance and propagation constant. Asymmetrical networks,
Image and Iterative impedances. Image transfer constant and iterative transfer constant. Properties
of L, T and Pi section types.
MODULE 2- PASSIVE FILTERS (9L+3T)
Classification of filters, filter networks, equation of filter networks, classification of pass band and
stop band, characteristics impedance in pass band and stop band, constant k‐low pass and high pass
filter, band pass filter, band elimination filter.
MODULE 3- ATTENUATORS AND EQUALIZERS (9L+3T)
Attenuators and equalizers Attenuators‐type, π‐type, Lattice, Bridge, L‐Type attenuators; series,
shunt, delay, attenuation equalizers
MODULE 4 – TRANSMISSION LINE THEORY (9L+3T)
The Lumped‐Element Circuit Model for a Transmission Line, Transmission line equations and their
solutions, Transmission line parameters, Characteristic impedance, Propagation constant,
Attenuation constant, Phase constant, Waveform distortion, Distortion less transmission lines, Input
impedance of lossless lines – reflection on a line not terminated by Zo ‐ Transfer impedance–
reflection factor and reflection loss – T and Π Section equivalent to lines.
MODULE 5 – TRANSMISSION LINES AT RADIO FREQUENCIES (9L+3T)
Loading of transmission lines, Reflection coefficient and VSWR. Equivalent circuits of transmission
lines,
Transmission lines at radio frequency. Open circuited and Short circuited lines, Smith Chart,
Application of the Smith Chart– Conversion from impedance to reflection coefficient and vice‐versa.
Impedance to Admittance conversion and vice versa – Input impedance of a lossless line terminated
by an impedance – Stub matching: single stub matching and double stub matching.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA

89
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, "Electro Magnetic Waves and Radiating Systems", PHI, 1968, Reprint
2005
2. J.D. Ryder, “Networks, Lines and Fields”, 2nd edition, Pearson Education India, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 G.S.N. Raju, “Electromagnetic field theory and transmission lines”, 1st edition (3rd reprint),
Pearson Education India, 2009
2 John D.Kraus and Ronalatory Marhefka, "Antennas", Tata McGraw‐Hill Book Company, 2002.
3 R.E.Collins, 'Antennas and Radio Propagation ", McGraw‐Hill, 1987.
4 Ballany , "Antenna Theory " , John Wiley & Sons, second edition , 2003.
5 Prasad, K.D./ Antennas and Wave Propagation/ Khanna Publications, 2001.
E BOOKS
1 Mathew. N. O. Sadiku, Principles of Electromagnetics.
2 http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
3 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐630‐
electromagnetics‐fall‐2006/index.htm
2 http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117101056/ : By Prof. R.K. Shevgaonkar, IIT Bombay.
3 Antenna and wave propagation(web), http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/117101057/
4 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐661‐receivers‐
antennas‐and‐signals‐spring‐2003/lecture‐notes/
5 http://www.creativeworld9.com/2011/02/learn‐antennas‐and‐wave‐propagation.html

90
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4217 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understanding the concept of continuous time & discrete time signals and
1. 1,2,3,5
systems.
Understanding time and frequency domain analysis techniques to different
2. 1,2,4,5
signals.
3. Knowledge on the properties and applications of Laplace Transform. 1,2,4,5,6
4. Knowledge on the properties and applications of Z‐ Transform. 1,2,3,4,5,6
5. Knowledge on the properties and applications of Fourier series and transform. 1,2,3,5,6
Prerequisites: ‐ Basic understanding of differential and integral calculus, limits and adequate
knowledge of mathematics.
MODULE 1 –CONTINUOUS AND DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS (9L+3T)
Mathematical representation, classification of Continuous Time and Discrete Time signals, arithmetic
operations on the signals, transformation of independent variable, Mathematical representation,
classification of CT and DT systems, Sampling and reconstruction, aliasing effect.
MODULE 2 – TIME DOMAIN ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS AND DISCRETE TIME SIGNALS AND
SYSTEMS (9L+3T)
Properties of LTI systems, impulse and step response, Use of convolution integral and convolution
sum for analysis of LTI systems, Properties of convolution integral/sum.

MODULE 3 – FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS TIME SYSTEM USING LAPLACE

TRANSFORM (9L+3T)
Need of Laplace transform, review of Laplace transform, properties, inverse of Laplace transform,
concept of ROC, poles and zeros, Unilateral Laplace transform, Analysis and characterization of LTI
system using Laplace transform: impulse and step response, causality, stability, stability of causal
system, Block diagram representation of Continuous Time systems.

MODULE 4 – FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS OF DISCRETE TIME SYSTEM USING Z- TRANSFORM

(9L+3T)
Need of Z transform, definition, properties of unilateral and bilateral Z Transform, mapping with s
plane, relationship with Laplace transform, Z transform of standard signals, ROC, poles and zeros of
transfer function, inverse Z transform, Analysis and characterization of LTI system using Z transform:
impulse and step response, causality, stability of causal system, Block diagram representation and
system realization.

91
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – FREQUENCY DOMAIN ANALYSIS OF CONTINUOUS AND DISCRETE SIGNALS USING

FOURIER (9L+3T)
Review of Fourier series, Discrete time Fourier series and its properties, Fourier transform, properties
of Fourier transform, relationship with Laplace and Z transform, Discrete time Fourier transform,
Properties, Frequency sampling, Discrete Fourier transform, Properties.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Allan V.Oppenheim, S.Wilsky and S.H. Nawab, “Signals and Systems”, Pearsons,2007
2. Edward W Kamen & Bonnie’s Heck, “Fundamentals of Signals and Systems”,
Pearson Education, 2007.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 John G.Proakis and DimitrisG.Manolakis, Digital Signal Processing, Principles,
Algorithms and Applications, 4th Edition, PHI, 2006.
2 B. P. Lathi, “Principles of Linear Systems and Signals”, Second Edition, Oxford, 2009.
3 R.E.Zeimer, W.H.Tranter and R.D.Fannin, “Signals & Systems ‐ Continuous and Discrete”,
Pearson, 2007.
4 John Alan Stuller, “An Introduction to Signals and Systems”, Thomson, 2007
5 M.J.Roberts, “Signals & Systems Analysis using Transform Methods & MATLAB”, Tata
McGraw Hill, 2007.
E BOOKS
1 http://bookboon.com/en/introduction‐to‐digital‐signal‐and‐system‐analysis‐ebook
2 Text book companionhttp://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 Signals and Systems (web), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104074/
2 Signals and Systems (web), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055/

92
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECB4218 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understand the architecture, instruction set and programming of 8085 and 8086
1. 1,2
microprocessor.
2. Understand the architecture of 8051 and ARM microcontroller 1,2
3. Understand interfacing concepts of microcontroller 1,3,4
Know the concepts of embedded processors hardware, software and System on
4. 1,2,3
a Chip, devices, buses and networking protocols
Know the concepts of real time operating system, inter process communication
5. 1,3,4,12
and Real time Study
Prerequisites:
MODULE 1 – OVERVIEW OF MICROPROCESSOR (9L)
Overview of Microprocessor‐Architecture‐Interrupts‐ Instruction set ‐Assembly language
programming‐8 bit arithmetic using 8085 & 8086
MODULE 2 – MICROCONTROLLERS (9L)
8051 Functional block diagram –Addressing mode – Interrupts‐Instruction set‐ Simple Programming‐
Introduction to RISC processors; ARM microcontrollers interface designs.
MODULE 3 – PHERIPHERAL INTERFACING (9L)
Interfacing with peripherals ‐ timer, serial I/O, parallel I/O, keyboard and display, A/D and D/A
converters.
MODULE 4 – INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (9L)
Introduction and Classification – Overview of Processors and hardware units in an embedded system
– Software embedded into the system –– Embedded Systems on a Chip (SoC)‐Examples of an
Embedded System‐Design tradeoff.
MODULE 5 – REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEMS (9L)
Operating System Services‐ Goals – Structures‐ Kernel –RTOS Task scheduling models ‐ Inter Process
Communications using Signals – Semaphore Flag or mutex as Resource key – Message Queues –
Mailboxes – Pipes – Virtual (Logical) Sockets – Remote Procedure Calls (RPCs)‐Overview of real time
programming language.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor – Architecture, Programming and Applications with the
8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall.,2002.
2. K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications", Penram
Intl, 1996.
3. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TATA McGraw‐Hill,
Second Edition‐2009.
93
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 William Kleitz, ‘Microprocessor and Micro Controller Fundamental of 8085 and 8051
Hardware and Software’, Pearson Education, 1998.
2 Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Second Edition‐2003, Newnes,
3 David E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint
2000.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.pdfdrive.net/the‐8051‐microcontroller‐and‐embedded‐e952238.html
2. http://www.ebooklibrary.org/articles/arm_architecture
3. engineersevanigam.blogspot.com/.../embedded-systems-by-raj-kamal-ebook-pdf.html
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs05
2 nptel.ac.in/courses/106105036/24

94
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE MATLAB AND SIMULINK LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4241 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
Prerequisites: - Familiar with MATLAB programming environment and the usage of Simulink block
sets for communication engineering
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Get a clear understanding of the basics of MATLAB , various windows and how to use 1,2
1
help system
2 Learn how to work with matrices, and their operations 1,2,3
Understand the usage of basic digital modulation schemes using Simulink
3 1,2,5
blocksets
4 Enable the student to identify programming errors 1,2
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Introduction to MATLAB, MATLAB help system
2. Arrays, Multidimensional arrays, Operations
3. Functions
4. Arithmetic and Logical operators
5. Conditional statements and loops
6. Plotting, special plotting: 3D plotting
7. Generation of various signals and sequences
8. Simulink Basics
9. Simulink modeling of basic modulation systems
10. Editing and Debugging MATLAB Programs
TEXT BOOKS
1 Rudra Pratap, “Getting Started with MATLAB 6.0” ,1st Edition, Oxford University Press‐2004.
2 Duane Hanselman ,Bruce LittleField, “Mastering MATLAB 7” , Pearson Education Inc, 2005
3 William J.Palm, “Introduction to MATLAB 6.0 for Engineers”, Mc Graw Hill & Co, 2001
4 Fausett L.V. (2007) Applied Numerical Analysis Using MATLAB, 2nd Ed., Pearson Education
REFERENCES
Brian R. Hunt, Ronald L. Lipsman, Jonathan M. Rosenberg, Kevin R. Coombes, John E. Osborn,
1 Garrett J. Stuck. “A guide to MATLAB: For begginers and experienced users” Cambridge
University Press, 2006
2 MATLAB Tutorial files, www.mathworks.com
3 Chapra S.C. and Canale R.P. (2006) Numerical Methods for Engineers, 5th Ed., McGraw Hil
EBOOK
MATLAB Machine Learning 1st ed. Edition, Kindle Edition by Michael
1
Paluszek (Author), Stephanie Thomas (Author)
MOOCS
NPTEL Links:-
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103106074/
95
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE MICROCONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEMS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4242 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Write the program for 8085 arithmetic operations 1,2,5
2. Write the program for 8086 arithmetic operations 1,2,5
3. Write the program for interfacing peripheral devices with 8085 & 8086 1,2,5
4. Write the program for 8051arithmetic, logical and interfacing stepper motor 1,2,5
5. Write the program for interfacing peripheral devices with ARM microcontroller 1,2,5,6
Prerequisites: -
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Addition and Subtraction of two 8bit numbers and 16bit numbers using 8085
2. Multiplication and Division of two 16bit numbers using 8086
3. Programs for String manipulation operations using 8086
4. Interfacing ADC and DAC
5. Interfacing and Programming 8279 and 8253.
6. Addition and Subtraction of two 8bit numbers using 8051
7. Multiplication and Division of two 8bit numbers using 8051
8. Interfacing of Stepper Motor
9. Interfacing of Keyboard and LCD with ARM microcontroller using keil uvision software
10. Interfacing of Real time clock and LED with ARM microcontroller using keil uvision software
TEXT BOOKS
1. Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor – Architecture, Programming and Applications with the
8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall.,2002.
2. K.J. Ayala, "The 8051 Microcontroller: Architecture, Programming, and Applications", Penram
Intl, 1996.
3. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TATA McGraw‐Hill,
Second Edition‐2009.
REFERENCE BOOKS
William Kleitz, ‘Microprocessor and Micro Controller Fundamental of 8085 and 8051 Hardware
1.
and Software’, Pearson Education, 1998.
2. Steve Heath, Embedded Systems Design, Second Edition‐2003, Newnes,
3. David E.Simon, An Embedded Software Primer, Pearson Education Asia, First Indian Reprint 2000.
E BOOKS
1. www.engineerclub.in/2013/11/8085‐microprocessor‐by‐ramesh‐s‐gaonkar.html
2. electronicsforu.com › Resources › Cool Stuff
3. engineersevanigam.blogspot.com/.../embedded-systems-by-raj-kamal-ebook-pdf.html
MOOC
1. nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs05
3. nptel.ac.in/courses/106105036/24

96
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT – II CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4243 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9
Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant
3. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
application
Prerequisites: ECB4233, ECB4216,ECB4217, ECB4218, MATLAB, MULTISIM
LAB / MINI PROJECT
In this project, each team with maximum of five members is expected to design and develop
practical solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research.
Software usage should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from
the subject in the current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions
to various applications. At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the
project work carried out. Assessment is made as follows

Assessment Model: LE
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 20%
Third Review & Demo 35%
Report 15%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%

97
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – V

OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES 4
COURSE TITLE CREDITS
( EXCEPT CSE, MECHATRONICS )
COURSE CODE MAA4301 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 3-1-0-0
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL:1 –4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to formulate engineering problems as mathematical 1,2,3,4,5,6
optimization problems.
2. Skilled to apply the concept of linear and nonlinear programming 1,2,3,4,5,6
problem to the engineering problem
3. Competent to apply the concept of integer programming problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,11
to the engineering problem
4. Proficient to recognize the solution for assignment problem and 1,2,3,4,5,6,11
transportation problem for optimal solution.
5. Able to understand the designs of networks 1,2,3,4,5,11
Prerequisites : Nil
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION TO OPTIMIZATION (9L+3T)
Introduction to operations research – objective – scope of OR – Limitations of OR – Introduction and
formulation of linear programming – Solving LPP using Graphical method.
Suggested Reading: Basics of inequalities
MODULE 2: LINEAR PROGRAMMMING PROBLEM (9L+3T)
Solving LPP using simplex method – Big‐M method – Two phase method – conversion of primal to
dual.
Suggested Reading: System of equations
MODULE 3: INTEGER PROGRAMMING (9L+3T)
Integer programming – Cutting plane method – Gomory’s Mixed integer method – Branch and
Bound method
Suggested Reading: System of equations
MODULE 4: ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSPORTATION PROBLEM (9L+3T)
Hungarian Method – Maximization and unbalanced assignment problem – Basic feasible solution of
transportation problem – Modi method – Degeneracy – Unbalanced Transportation problem.
Suggested Reading: Arithmetic Calculation
MODULE 5: PERT AND CPM (9L+3T)
Network diagram – Representation – Labeling – CPM – PERT probabilities of CPM – PERT probabilities
of project duration.
Suggested Reading: Basics of graphs

98
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1 Chandrasekaran A, “A Text book of Operation Research”, Dhanam Publications, Chennai, 2017
2 V. Sundaresan, K. S. Ganapathy Subramanian, K. Ganesan, “Resource Management
Techniques”, A. R. Publications, 2004
3 S. D. Sharma, “Operation Research”, Kedarnath Ramnath & Co, 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Hamdy A. Taha, “Operations Research: An Introduction (9th Edition)”, Prentice Hall, 2010
2. D S Hira & Prem Kumar Gupta, “Introduction to Operations Research”, S. Chand Publishing, 2012
E BOOKS
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106134/1
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_mg10/preview
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/operations‐management‐iimbx‐om101‐1x

COURSE TITLE CONTROL SYSTEMS CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4301 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Describe various input/output models of dynamic system. 1,2,3,4,5,6
2 Determine the time response of a control system for various test inputs. 1,2,3,4,5,6
3 Determine the frequency response using various plots. 1,2,3,4,5,6
4 Understand the concept of stability using various stability criteria. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
5 Apply Bode plot to design phase lead‐lag compensation. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Prerequisites: - Trigonometric formulas, Methods of differentiation, Methods of integration, Partial
Fractions, Matrices, Laplace Transforms.
MODULE 1:- SYSTEM REPRESENTATION (9L)
Basic elements in control systems – Open and closed loop systems – Electrical analogy of mechanical
and rotational systems – Transfer function – Synchros – AC and DC servo motors – Block diagram
reduction techniques – Signal flow graphs.
Suggested Reading:- Differential Equations, Laplace Transforms, Modelling Electrical motors.
MODULE 2:- TIME RESPONSE (9L)
Time response – Time domain specifications – Types of test input – I and II order system response –
Error coefficients – Generalized error series – Steady state error – P, PI, PID modes of feedback control.
Suggested Reading: - Error analysis, Time series, Binomial Series, Controller Design, Continuous time
systems analysis.
MODULE 3:- FREQUENCY RESPONSE (9L)
Frequency response – Bode plot – Polar plot – Constant M and N circles – Nichols chart –
Determination of closed loop response from open loop response – Correlation between frequency
domain and time domain specifications.
Suggested Reading: ‐ Frequency Domain characteristics and Analysis.

99
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 4:- STABILITY OF CONTROL SYSTEM (9L)

Characteristics equation – Location of roots in S plane for stability – Routh Hurwitz criterion – Root
locus construction – Effect of pole, zero addition – Gain margin and phase margin – Nyquist stability
criteria.
Suggested Reading: - Stability analysis of Systems.
MODULE 5:- COMPENSATOR DESIGN (9L)
Performance criteria – Lag, lead and lag‐lead networks – Compensator design using bode plot.
Introduction to Digital Control Systems, Introduction to State Variable Analysis and Design ‐ Advances
in Control Systems.
Suggested Reading:- Compensator Design, SISO, MISO
TEXT BOOKS

1 Ogata.K, Modern Control System Engineering Fifth Edition –Pearsons, 2010.

I.J. Nagrath& M. Gopal, Control Systems Engineering, New Age International Publishers, Sixth
2
edition, 2017.
3 “Automatic Control Systems” by B.C. Kuo, Tenth Edition, 2017, McGraw‐Hill Education.
“Feedback Control of Dynamic Systems” by G.F. Franklin, J.D. Powell and A. Emami‐Naeini,
4
Seventh edition, 2015, Pearson education Ltd.
“Control Systems Engineering” by Norman S. Nise , Seventh Edition, 2013, John Wiley & Sons,
5
Incorporated.
“Problems and Solutions of Control Systems: With Essential Theory” by Jairath AK, fourth
6
edition, 2007, CBS Publishers & Distributors.
REFERENCES
M. Gopal, Control Systems, Principles & Design, Fourth edition, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
1
2012.
2 M.N. Bandyopadhyay, Control Engineering Theory and Practice, Prentice Hall of India, 2009
“Control Systems Engineering: Analysis and Design ” by Norman S. Nise, seventh edition,
3
2015,Wiley sons.
EBOOK
1 http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
2 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
NPTEL Links:-
1 Control Engineering(web), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102044/
2 Control Engineering(video), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108102043/
3 Advanced control system(video), http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108103007/
4 http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/11/control‐engineering.html
5 Virtual Lab:‐ http://iitb.vlab.co.in/?sub=8&brch=117&sim=959&cnt=2017
6 http://vlcsd.virtual‐laboratories.com/html/index.html

100
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECB4302 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to explain about fundamentals of Analog communication 1,3,4,6,10
2. Able to explain Pulse modulation techniques 1,2,3,4,7,10
3. Able to explain all digitalization techniques 1,2,3,4,5,7,10
4. Able to explain digital modulation techniques 1,2,3,4,5,7,10
5. Able to explain error detecting and correcting codes 1,2,3,4,5,7
MODULE 1 – FUNDAMENTALS OF ANALOG COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS (9L)
Introduction to Communication Systems: Modulation – Types ‐ Need for Modulation. Theory of
Amplitude Modulation ‐ Evolution and Description of SSB Techniques ‐ Theory of Frequency and Phase
Modulation – Comparison of various Analog Communication System (AM – FM – PMBand Pass Signals
and Systems, Band Pass Transmission, Bandwidth, Double Side Band Amplitude Modulation – AM
Signals and Spectra, DSB Signals and Spectra, Suppressed Side Band Amplitude Modulation ‐ Single Side
Band Signals and Spectra, Single Side Band Generation, Vestigial Side Band Signals and Spectra,
Illustrative Problems.

MODULE 2 - PULSE MODULATION TECHNIQUES (9L)

Pulse amplitude modulation – Flat top sampling and Pulse amplitude modulation (PAM), Pulse‐Time
Modulation – Pulse Duration and Pulse Position modulations, PPM spectral analysis, Illustrative
Problems
MODULE 3 : DIGITIZATION TECHNIQUES (9L)
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) ‐ Generation and Reconstruction, Quantization Noise, Non‐Uniform
Quantization and Companding, PCM with Noise, Delta modulation, Adaptive Delta Modulation,
Differential PCM systems (DPCM), Digital Multiplexing‐Multiplexers and Hierarchies
MODULE 4 – BAND PASS DIGITAL TRANSMISSION (9L)

Quadrature Carrier and M–ary Systems‐ Quadrature Carrier Systems,M–ary PSK Systems, M–ary QAM
Systems, M–ary FSK Systems, BPSK and FSK, Timing and Synchronization, Interference, Non‐Coherent
Binary Systems, Non‐Coherent FSK, Differentially Coherent PSK, Optimum Binary Detection, Coherent
ASK (OOK (on‐off keying)).

MODULE 5 - CHANNEL CODING (9L)

Error Detection & Correction ‐ Repetition & Parity Check Codes,Interleaving, Code Vectors and
Hamming Distance, Forward Error Correction (FEC) Systems, Automatic Retransmission Query (ARQ)
Systems, Linear Block Codes – Matrix Representation of Block Codes, Convolutional Codes –
Convolutional Encoding, Decoding Methods

101
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
A. Bruce Carlson, & Paul B. Crilly, ―Communica on Systems – An
1. Introduction to Signals & Noise in Electrical Communication‖, McGraw‐Hill International
Edition, 5th Edition, 2010
2. Simon Haykin, ―Communica on Systems‖, Wiley‐India edition, 3rd edition, 2010
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Sam Shanmugam, ―Digital and Analog Communica on Systems‖,John Wiley, 2005
E BOOKS
1 http://www.eem.anadolu.edu.tr/tansufilik/EEM%20409/icerik/Communication%20Syste
ms%20‐%204ed%20‐%20Haykin.pdf
2 http://www.freebookcentre.net/Electronics/Communications‐Systems‐Books.html
3 https://www.efxkits.co.uk/download-free-ebook-on-communication-systems/
MOOC
1 Many Videos available in Youtube and IIT Madras as a part of NPTEL

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4303 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES POs
1. To compare the performances of DFT using FFT algorithms. 1,2,3,4,5
2. To design IIR filters as per the given specifications 1,2,3,4,5
To design and Compare the responses of practical FIR Filter as per
3. 1,2,3,4,5
the given specifications
To analyze the effects of quantization errors and the need of
4. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
MultiMate sampling techniques
To apply the concepts to write program using DSP Processors for
5. 1,3,4,5,6,7,12
data validation
Prerequisites: Engineering Mathematics & Signals and Systems
MODULE 1 – EXISTENCE OF FOURIER TRANSFORM IN DSP 9L+3T
The Discrete Fourier Transform –Frequency Domain Sampling, Properties of DFT. Computation of DFT ‐
FFT Algorithms (Radix 2 only), Linear Filtering and Correlation using DFT.
Suggested reading‐ Application of FFT in real time examples
MODULE 2 – FIR FILTER DESIGN TECHNIQUES 9L+3T
Design of FIR Filters‐ FIR Filters using Window method and Frequency Sampling Method, Design of
Linear‐Phase FIR Filters.
Suggested reading‐ Kaiser window technique and its importance

102
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 3 – IIR FILTER DESIGN CONCEPTS 9L+3T

Design of IIR Digital Filters from Analog Filters‐ IIR Filter Design by Impulse Invariance, IIR Filter Design
by Bilinear Transformation. Implementation of efficient Filter structures:
Suggested reading‐ Performance comparison of Butterworth and Chebyshev filter design concepts
MODULE 4 – FINITE WORD LENGTH EFFECTS IN DSP 9L+3T
Analysis of finite word length effects‐ Quantization noise, round off errors, input and output quantization
error, limit cycles in IIR filters. Multi‐rate Digital Signal Processing‐ Decimation and Interpolation concepts
‐ Sampling Rate Conversion for real time applications
Suggested reading‐ Need for QMF and Poly phase filters for real time applications
MODULE 5 – ARCHITECTUREL DESCRIPTIONS OF DSP PROCESSORS 9L+3T
Computer architecture for signal processing ‐ Architecture of TMS320C 5416 and 6713 processors and
its functional characteristics
Case study of multistage sampling applications in real time.
Suggested reading‐ Advanced DSP processor for real time applications
TEXT BOOKS
1. John G Proakis, Dimitris G Monolakis‐Digital Signal Processing, 4/e, PHI. 2006
2. B.Venkataramani & M. Bhaskar, Digital Signal Processor Architecture, Programming and
Application, TMH 2002
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Sanjith K Mitra : Digital Signal Processing, 4/e, Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2010
2 Rulph Chassaing, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the C6713 and C6416 DSK,
Wiley Inter‐science, 2005.
3 Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jervis: Digital Signal Processing, 2/e, Pearson Education /PHI,
1993.
4 P.P. Vaidyanathan, Multirate Systems and Filter Banks, PHI, 2004.
5 Avtar singh, S.Srinivasan, “DSP Implementation using DSP microprocessor with Examples” from
TMS32C54XX ‐Thamson / Brooks cole Publishers, 2003
E BOOKS
1 http://electronicsforu.com/resources/cool‐stuff‐misc/8‐free‐ebooks‐digital‐signal‐processing

2 http://www.freebookcentre.net/Electronics/DSP‐Books‐Download.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104070/
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res‐6‐008‐digital‐signal‐processing‐spring‐2011/readings/

103
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4331 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to understand the Sampling and Multiplexing concepts 1,3,4,5
2. Able to Understand the AM and FM Techniques 1,3,4,5
3. Able to understand the Digital communication concepts 1,3,4,5
4. Able to understand the Error control coding schemes 1,3,4,5
5. Able to understand the Simulation 1,3,4,5
LIST OF LABORATORY EXPERIMENT
1. Signal Sampling and reconstruction.
2. Time Division Multiplexing.
3. AM Modulator and Demodulator
4. FM Modulator and Demodulator.
5. Pulse Code Modulation and Demodulation.
6. Delta Modulation and Demodulation Observation (simulation) of signal constellations of BPSK, QPSK
and QAM
7. Line coding schemes
8. FSK, PSK and DPSK schemes (Simulation)
9. Error control coding schemes ‐ Linear Block Codes (Simulation)
10. Communication link simulation
11. Equalization – Zero Forcing & LMS algorithms(simulation)
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Channel Coding: Parallel Concatenated Convolutional Coding using Turbo Codes.
2. Channel Coding: Tail‐Biting Convolutional Coding
3. Modulation: Design & Simulate Filter Bank Multi‐Carrier (FBMC) with Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiplexing (OFDM)
4. Modulation: Design & Simulate Passband Modulation with Adjacent Channel Interference by using
baseband modulators & demodulators.
5. Channel Models, Impairments, and Corrections: Simultaneous Simulation of Multiple Fading Channels
with WINNER II Channel Model
6. Channel Models, Impairments, and Corrections: End‐to‐End QAM Simulation with RF Impairments
and Corrections
7. MIMO: Massive MIMO Hybrid Beamforming using Hybrid Beamforming.
8. MIMO: MIMO‐OFDM Precoding with Phased Arrays.
9. Software‐Defined Radio: build an FM mono or stereo receiver: FM Broadcast Receiver.
10. RF Modeling: Analysis of Impact of an RF Receiver on Communication System Performance

104
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4332 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Ability to program digital signal processing concepts in MATLAB as per the
1. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
requirement
Ability to program a DSP chip with a variety of real‐time and Non real‐time signal
2. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Processing algorithms, such as filtering for noise reduction
Prerequisites: NIL
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
MATLAB & SIMULINK Based Experiments:
1. Generation of various Signals thereby to understand their characteristics
2. Calculation of Linear and circular convolution for the given two sequences
3. Analyze the Sampling process and effect of Aliasing due to sampling
4. Design of various FIR filter for the given specifications as per the application
5. Design of Butterworth and Chebyshev analog filters for the given specifications
6. Calculation of FFT and IFFT of a time domain signal.
7. Design of digital IIR filter for the given specifications based on Impulse Invariant and Bilinear
Transformation method
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS USING DSP PROCESSOR-TMS C 4516,6713,6748
1. Experiments using DSP processor and Code composer studio tool
2. Understand various addressing modes of Digital Signal Processors using simple programming
examples.
3. Calculate Sample values of the given continuous sinusoidal input signal.
4. Calculation of Linear and circular convolution between two sequences
5. Calculation of FFT.
6. Real time Audio signal processing using TMS C 6748 processor
7. Noise reduction of the real time signal using TMS C 6748 processor
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Streaming Signal Processing: Wavelet Denoising using different types of System Objects.
2. Streaming Signal Processing: LPC Analysis and Synthesis of Speech.
3. Signal Processing: Design & Model analog‐to‐digital conversion using a sigma‐delta algorithm
implementation.
4. Signal Processing: Filter a sinusoid with the Overlap‐Add and Overlap‐Save FFT methods using the
Frequency‐Domain FIR filter block.
5. Filter Design: Classic IIR Filter Design.
6. Filter Design: Efficient Narrow Transition‐Band FIR Filter Design
7. Multistage Design: Design of Decimators/Interpolators: half band, Multistage Design, Simple
designs for Arbitrary Rate Conversion, Aliasing with Nyquist Rate.
8. Generate a Multi‐Threaded MEX File from a MATLAB Function using DSP Unfolding.

105
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

9. Adaptive Processing: Design An Adaptive Line Enhancer (ALE) with the goal of removing noise signal
from the measured Adaptive Processing: signal to obtain the signal of interest.
10. Adaptive Noise Cancellation Using RLS Adaptive Filtering
REFERENCES
1. S. J. Orfanidis, DSP Lab Manual, 2011
2. S. J. Orfanidis, Introduction to Signal Processing, Prentice‐Hall, 1996, and available freely oline
from:http://www.ece.rutgers.edu/~orfanidi/intro2sp/
3. R. Chassaing and D. Reay, Digital Signal Processing and Applications with the TMS320C6713
and TMS320C6416 DSK, 2nd ed., Wiley, Hoboken, NJ, 2008
4. D.L. Jones, "Effective DSP Laboratory Course Design," DSPSFest'99, Houston, Texas, August 4‐
6, 1999
MOOC
1 http://www.ti.com/product/TMS320C6748
2 http://www.ti.com/processors/dsp/overview.html?

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT – III CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4333 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,11
Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant
3. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,11
application
Prerequisites: ECB4243, ECB4301,ECB4302, ECB4303, MATLAB, MULTISIM
LAB / MINI PROJECT
In this project, each team with maximum of five members is expected to design and develop practical
solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research. Software usage
should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the
current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications.
At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work carried out.
Assessment is made as follows
Assessment Model: LE
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 20%
Third Review & Demo 35%
Report 15%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%

106
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – VI
COURSE TITLE COMPUTER NETWORKS CREDITS 3
COURSE CODE ECB4316 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to study and understand the basics of computer networks. 1,5,6
Able to get familiarize with the up‐to‐date developments in 1,3,5,6,12
2.
switching technology.
3. Able to understand the techniques involved in the transport layer. 1,3,4,5,6
4. Able to understand the network layers principles. 1,3,4,5,6
5. Able to understand the concepts in application layer. 1,3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites: Knowledge in basics of computers and computer programming.
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER NETWORKS (9L)
Introduction to computer networks and the Internet ‐ Application layer ‐ Principles of network
Applications ‐ The Web and Hyper Text Transfer Protocol ‐ File transfer ‐ Electronic mail – Domain name
system ‐ Peer‐to‐Peer file sharing ‐ Socket programming ‐ Layering concepts.
Suggested Reading: IEEE Standards and Specifications.
MODULE 2 – SWITCHING IN NETWORKS (9L)
Classification and requirements of switches, a generic switch, Circuit Switching, Time‐division
switching, Space‐division switching, Crossbar switch and evaluation of blocking probability, 2‐stage, 3‐
stage and n‐stage networks, Packet switching, Blocking in packet switches, Three generations of packet
switches, switch fabric, Buffering, Multicasting, Statistical Multiplexing.
Suggested Reading: Queuing Theory Applications.
MODULE 3 – TRANSPORT LAYER (9L)
Connectionless transport ‐ User Datagram Protocol, Connection oriented transport – Transmission
Control Protocol, Remote Procedure Call.
Suggested Reading: Internet Traffic Management.
MODULE 4 – NETWORK LAYER (9L)
Logical addressing: IPv4, IPv6 addresses Internet Protocol: Internetworking – IPv4, IPv6 ‐ address
mapping – ARP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, ICMP, IGMP, Delivery ‐ Forwarding ‐ Routing – Unicast, Multicast
routing protocols.
Suggested Reading: ISP responsibilities.
MODULE 5 – APPLICATION LAYER (9L)
Domain Name System (DNS) – E‐mail – FTP – WWW – HTTP – Multimedia Network Security:
Cryptography – Symmetric key and Public Key algorithms ‐ Digital signature – Management of Public
keys – Communication Security – Authentication Protocols.
Suggested Reading: DES and AES algorithms.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA

107
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw‐Hill,
Fourth edition, July 2017.
2. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second Edition,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOK
1 Andrew S. Tannenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition,2010.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/30
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐263j‐data‐
communication‐networks‐fall‐2002/
3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐976‐high‐
speed‐communication‐circuits‐and‐systems‐spring‐2003/

COURSE TITLE OPTICAL COMMUNICATION CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECB4317 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Understand the optical fiber link and fiber modes & configurations 1,2,5
Have knowledge in different types of losses, signal distortion in optical fibers and
2. 1,2,5
design optimization for fibers
3. Know the types of optical sources and fiber networking components 1,2,5
4. Understand the various optical receivers and their performance 1,2,5
5. Understand the working of digital transmission system, SONET / SDH 1,2,5,6,7
Prerequisites: Analog Communication, Digital Communication
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
Evolution of fiber optic system‐ Element of an Optical Fiber Transmission link‐ Ray Optics‐Optical Fiber
Modes and Configurations –Mode theory of Circular Wave guides‐ Overview of Modes‐Key Modal
concepts‐ Linearly Polarized Modes –Single Mode Fibers‐Graded Index fiber structure, Photonic Crystal
Fibers(PCF) and characteristics
MODULE 2 – SIGNAL DEGRADATION ON OPTICAL FIBERS
Attenuation – Absorption losses, Scattering losses, Bending Losses, Core and Cladding losses, Signal
Distortion in Optical Wave guides‐Information Capacity determination –Group Delay‐Material
Dispersion, Wave guide Dispersion, Signal distortion in SM fibers‐Polarization Mode dispersion,
Intermodal dispersion, Pulse Broadening in GI fibers‐Mode Coupling.

108
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 3 – FIBER OPTIC SOURCES AND COUPLING

Direct and indirect Band gap materials‐LED structures –Light source materials – Modulation of a LED,
lasers Diodes‐Modes–External Quantum efficiency –Resonant frequencies –Laser Diodes, Temperature
effects, Introduction to Quantum laser, Fiber amplifiers‐ Power Launching and coupling, Lencing
schemes, Fiber –to‐ Fiber joints, Fiber splicing
MODULE 4 – RECEIVERS
PIN and APD diodes –Photo detector noise, SNR, Detector Response time, Avalanche Multiplication
Noise –Comparison of Photo detectors –Fundamental Receiver Operation – preamplifiers, Error
Sources –Receiver Configuration –Probability of Error – Quantum Limit.
MODULE 5 –DIGITAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Point‐to‐Point links System considerations –Link Power budget –Rise ‐ time budget –Noise Effects on
System Performance‐Operational Principles of WDM, Solitons‐Erbium‐doped Amplifiers. Basic on
concepts of SONET/SDH Network. Passive Optical Networks‐FTTH Systems
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
1. Simulation of Simple Optical Communication networks using Optsim Software
TEXT BOOKS
1. Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication” McGraw –Hill International, 4th ed., 2010
2. J.Senior, “Optical Communication, Principles and Practice”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of
India, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Keiser, “Optical Communication essentials”, McGraw‐Hill Companies (28 July 2003)
2 G.P Agrawal, “Fiber‐Optic Communication Systems”, Wiley; Third edition, 2007
E BOOKS
1 http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
2 https://www.intechopen.com/books/optical‐communication

109
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ANTENNA AND WAVE PROPAGATION CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4318 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understand the antenna fundamentals and the radiation of the thin linear
1. 1,2,3
wire antennas
Understand the array of point sources and uniform linear arrays and also know
2. 1,2,3,4,5,7
about the loop antennas
Understand the radiation mechanism of travelling wave and wideband
3. 1,2,3
antennas
Understand the radiation of rectangular aperture, slot, parabolic reflector and
4. 1,2,3,4,5
lens antennas
5. Know the basic propagation and its types 1,2,3,5,7
Prerequisites:
Calculations pertaining to electro magnetic fields, lay a strong foundation on the theory of transmission
lines and wave guides by highlighting their applications.
MODULE 1 – ANTENNA FUNDAMENTALS AND RADIATION FIELDS OF WIRE ANTENNAS
REPRESENTATION (9L+3T)
Radiation intensity. Directive gain. Directivity. Power gain. Beam Width. Band Width. Gain and radiation
resistance of current element. Half‐wave dipole and folded dipole. Reciprocity principle. Effective length
and Effective area. Relation between gain effective length and radiation resistance. Concept of vector
potential. Modification for time varying, retarded case.
Fields associated with Hertzian dipole. Power radiated and radiation resistance of current element.
Radiation resistance of elementary dipole with linear current distribution. Radiation from half‐wave
dipole and quarter‐wave monopole.
MODULE 2 – ANTENNA ARRAYS AND LOOP ANTENNAS (9L+3T)
Antenna Arrays: Expression for electric field from two and three element arrays. Uniform linear array.
Method of pattern multiplication. Binomial array. Use of method of images for antennas above ground.
Loop Antennas: Radiation from small loop and its radiation resistance.. Helical antenna. Normal mode
and axial mode operation.
MODULE 3 – BROADBAND ANTENNAS (9L+3T)
Radiation mechanisms of traveling wave on a wire. Analysis and design of Rhombic antenna. Coupled
Antennas‐Self and mutual impedance of antennas. Yagi antennas. Log periodic antenna.
MODULE 4 – APERTURE ANTENNAS (9L+3T)
Huygens’ principle, radiation from rectangular and circular apertures, design considerations, Babinet’s
principle, Radiation from sectoral and pyramidal horns, design concepts .of Microstrip antennas
Basic Concepts of Smart Antennas:
Concept and benefits of smart antennas, Fixed weight beamforming basics, Adaptive beamforming

110
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – WAVE PROPAGATION (9L+3T)

The three basic types of propagation; ground wave, space wave and sky wave propagation.
Sky wave propagation: Structure of the ionosphere. Effective dielectric constant of ionized region.
Mechanism of refraction .Refractive index. Critical frequency. Skip distance. Effect of earth’s magnetic
field .Energy loss in the ionosphere due to collisions. Maximum usable frequency. Fading and Diversity
reception.
Space wave propagation: Reflection from ground for vertically and horizontally polarized waves.
Reflection characteristics of earth. Resultant of direct and reflected ray at the receiver. Duct propagation.
Ground wave propagation: Attenuation characteristics for ground wave propagation. Calculation of
field strength at a distance
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. E.C.Jordan and Balmain, "Electro Magnetic Waves and Radiating Systems", PHI, 1968, Reprint
2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 John D.Kraus and Ronalatory Marhefka, "Antennas", Tata McGraw‐Hill Book Company, 2002.
2 R.E.Collins, 'Antennas and Radio Propagation ", McGraw‐Hill, 1987.
3 Ballany , "Antenna Theory " , John Wiley & Sons, second edition , 2003.
4 Prasad, K.D./ Antennas and Wave Propagation/ Khanna Publications, 2001.
E BOOKS
1 http://engineeronadisk.com/book_modeling/
2 Text book companion http://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 Antenna and wave propagation(web), http://nptel.ac.in/downloads/117101057/

2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐661‐receivers‐
antennas‐and‐signals‐spring‐2003/lecture‐notes/
3 http://www.creativeworld9.com/2011/02/learn‐antennas‐and‐wave‐propagation.html

111
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECB4319 COURSE CATEGORY PC LTPS 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to study and understand the basics of wireless communication. 1,2,5,6
Able to get familiarize with the up‐to‐date developments in medium access
2. 1,2,3,4,5,6
alternatives of wireless communications.
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,
3. Able to understand the cellular system design fundamentals
12
4. Able to understand the concepts of wireless LAN and Bluetooth technologies. 1,2,5,6
Able to get familiarize with the up‐to‐date developments in 4G, LTE and MIMO 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,
5.
technologies. 12
Prerequisites :
MODULE I BASICS OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION (9L)
History of Wireless Communication ‐ General Model of Wireless Communication Link ‐ Types of Signals ‐
Wireless Channel and Radio Communication ‐ Free Space Propagation Model ‐ Channel Noise and Losses –
Fading ‐ Multipath Fading ‐ Fading Effects on Signal and Frequency – Shadowing ‐ Wireless Channel
Modeling: AWGN Channel, Rayleigh Channel, Rician Fading Channel.
Suggested Reading: Nakagami Fading Channel, Ocumura and Hata Path Loss Model.
MODULE II MEDIUM ACCESS ALTERNATIVES FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION (9L)
Spread Spectrum Modulation ‐ Pseudo‐Noise Codes with Properties and Code Generation Mechanisms ‐
DSSS and FHSS Systems ‐ Time Hopping and Hybrid Spread Systems; Multicarrier Modulation Techniques ‐
Zero Inter Symbol Interference Communication Techniques ‐ Detection Strategies ‐ Diversity Combining
Techniques: Selection Combining ‐ Threshold Combining ‐ Equal Gain Combining ‐ Maximum Ratio
Combining.
Suggested Reading: CDMA, TDMA and FDMA.

MODULE III CELLULAR SYSTEM DESIGN FUNDAMENTALS (9L)

Introduction to Cellular Communications ‐ GSM system for mobile Telecommunication ‐ Frequency reuse
‐ Multiple Access Technologies ‐ Cellular Processes ‐ Call Setup, Handover ‐ Teletraffic Theory ‐ General
Packet Radio Service – EDGE Technology ‐ CDMA Based Standards: IS 95 to CDMA 2000 ‐ Wireless Local
Loop.
Suggested Reading: IMT 2000 and UMTS.
MODULE IV WIRELESS LAN AND BLUETOOTH TECHNOLOGY (9L)
Introduction to Mobile Adhoc Networks – IEEE 802.11 Architecture and Services ‐ Bluetooth – Bluetooth
Protocol Stack ‐ Wi‐Fi Standards ‐ WiMax Standards – WLAN Technology – Requirements of WLAN –
Infrared Communication ‐ Li‐Fi Communication.
Suggested Reading: Piconets and Scatternets.

112
 CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE V LTE AND MIMO TECHNOLOGIES (9L)

Ultra‐Wideband Communication ‐ Mobile data networks ‐ Introduction to 4G and concept of NGN ‐ Long
Term Evolution (LTE) ‐ Mobile Satellite Communication ‐ Introduction to MIMO ‐ MIMO Channel Capacity
‐ SVD and Eigenmodes of the MIMO Channel ‐ MIMO Spatial Multiplexing – MIMO Diversity – MIMO ‐
OFDM.
Suggested Reading: Wireless Geo Location.
TEXT BOOKS
1. T.S. Rappaport, “Wireless Communication‐Principles and practice”, Pearson
Publications, Second Edition, 2010.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Upena Dalal and Manoj K. Shukla, “Wireless and Mobile Communication”, Oxford Press Publications,
2016.
2. Andrea Goldsmith, “Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press, 2012.
3. Ezio Biglieri and Robert Calderbank, “MIMO Wireless Communications”, Cambridge University Press,
2015.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs37/
3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐452‐principles‐of‐

113
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE BUSINESS ECONOMICS CREDITS 2

COURSE CODE GEA4304 COURSE CATEGORY BS L-T-P-S 2-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL- 2
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Demonstrate an understanding the introduction of economics 1
2 Demonstrating to know knowledge about cost analysis 5,11,12
3 Able to build knowledge about consumer’s and producer’s behavior 3,8,12
4 Enabling to know about budget 6,11,12
5 Educate about financial services 5,8,9,11,12
Prerequisites :Basic Economics
MODULE – 1: INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS
Introduction to Economics‐ Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Concept of Engineering
Economics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics
MODULE – 2: COST ANALYSIS
Types of Cost, Element of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break‐
even analysis, Economies of Scale Cost Classification
MODULE – 3: CONSUMER’S AND PRODUCER’S BEHAVIOUR
Consumer Behavior: Law of Diminishing Marginal utility – Equi marginal Utility – Consumer’s Equilibrium
‐ Indifference Curve – Production: Law of Variable Proportion – Laws of Returns to Scale – Producer‘s
equilibrium – Economies of Scale Cost Classification
MODULE – 4: BUDGET
Process of budgeting in India –classification of budgets trends – evaluation systems – types of deficits –
fiscal policy – indicators –– taxation – centre, state and local – public debt and management.
MODULE – 5: FINANCE
Basics of finance and financial environment – instruments of financial markets – financial intermediation
– investment banking and brokerage services – securities – types of securities – market for securities –
how and where traded – initial public offering (IPO) – secondary markets – trading on exchanges and
trading with margins.
TEXT BOOKS
1 S.Shankaran, Business Economics ‐ Margham Publications, 2012.
2 H.L. Ahuja, Business Economics – Micro & Macro ‐ Sultan Chand & Sons ‐ New Delhi – 55, 2016.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 S.A.Ross, R.W.Westerfield, J.Jaffe and Roberts: Corporate Finance, McGraw‐Hill, 2007.
2 Joseph E Stiglitz: Economics of the Public Sector, 2015.
ONLINE SOURCES
1 https://sites.google.com/site/readbookpdf7734/pdf‐download‐business‐economics‐by‐‐‐mark‐taylor‐
read‐online
2 https://bookboon.com/en/economics‐ebooks

114
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE COMPUTER NETWORKS LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4341 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to study and understand the basics of computer networks. 1,5,6
2. Able to get familiarize with the up‐to‐date developments in switching technology. 1,3,5,6,12
3. Able to understand the techniques involved in the transport layer. 1,3,4,5,6
4. Able to understand the network layers principles. 1,3,4,5,6
1,3,4,5,6,
5. Able to understand the concepts in application layer.
12
Prerequisites: Computer Networks
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
The following experiments are conducted using the Hardware.

1. PC to PC Communication.
Parallel Communication using 8 bit parallel cable.
Serial communication using RS 232C.
2. Ethernet LAN protocol.
To create scenario and study the performance of CSMA/CD protocol ethrol simulation.
3. Token bus and token ring protocols.
To create scenario and study the performance of token bus and token ring protocols through
simulation.
4. Wireless LAN protocols
To create scenario and study the performance of network with CSMA / CA protocol and
Compare with CSMA/CD protocols.
5. Implementation of distance vector and Link state routing algorithm.
6. Transfer of files from PC to PC using Windows / Unix socket processing.

The following experiments are conducted using either QUALNET/OPNET simulators.

7. Simulate a three nodes point‐to‐point network with duplex links between them. Set the queue size vary
the bandwidth and find the number of packets dropped.

8. Simulate a four node point‐to‐point network, and connect the links as follows: n0‐n2, n1‐n2 and n2‐n3.
Apply TCP agent between n0‐n3 and UDP n1‐n3. Apply relevant applications over TCP and UDP agents
changing the parameter and determine the number of packets by TCP/UDP.

9. Simulate the different types of Internet traffic such as FTP a TELNET over a network and analyze the
throughput.

115
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

10. Simulate the transmission of ping messaged over a network topology consisting of 6 Nodes and find
the number of packets dropped due to congestion.

11. Simulate an Ethernet LAN using N‐nodes (6‐10), change error rate and data rate and Compare the
throughput.
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. Basic WLAN Link Modeling
2. Design & Model WLAN Link.
3. Analysis of the performance of an IEEE® 802.11ac™ link by using beamforming
4. 802.11ax Parameterization for Waveform Generation and Simulation.
5. Generate an IEEE® 802.11ac™ transmission containing MAC frames suitable for performing radio
packet error rate (PER) receiver test
6. 802.11ac Packet Error Rate Simulation for 8x8 TGac Channel
7. 802.11ac Signal Recovery with Preamble Decoding
8. WLAN Link Modeling in Simulink
9. Joint Sampling Rate and Carrier Frequency Offset Tracking in WLAN receiver.
10. Design a receiver that is able to recover 802.11™ OFDM non‐HT based beacon packets transmitted
over the air from commercial 802.11 hardware.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Behrouz A. Forouzan, “Data communication and Networking”, Tata McGraw‐Hill,Fourth edition,
July 2017.
2. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Andrew S. Tannenbaum, “Computer Networks”, Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2010.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/30
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐263j‐data‐
communication‐networks‐fall‐2002/
3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐976‐high‐speed‐
communication‐circuits‐and‐systems‐spring‐2003/

116
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT – IV CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4342 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,12
2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,12
Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,12
3.
application
Prerequisites: ECB4333, ECB4316,ECB4317, ECB4318, ECB4319, MATLAB, MULTISIM
LAB / MINI PROJECT
In this project, each team with maximum of five members is expected to design and develop practical
solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research. Software usage
should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the
current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications.
At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work carried out.
Assessment is made as follows
Assessment Model: LE
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 20%
Third Review & Demo 35%
Report 15%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%

COURSE TITLE COMPREHENSION CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4343 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 1-0-0-1
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. To learn the analytical and technical skills 1,2,3,4
Goal:
To encourage the students to comprehend the knowledge acquired from the first semester to sixth
semester of B.Tech Degree Course.

117
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER – VII

COURSE TITLE VLSI DESIGN TECHNIQUES CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4401 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL- 4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Describe the techniques used for VLSI fabrication, design of CMOS logic
1. 1,3,4,5,6,7
circuits, Layout and Stick Diagram.
2. Explain the behavior of a MOS Transistor 1,3,4,10
3. Design combinational and sequential circuits using CMOS gates. 1,2,3,4,6,10
4. Discuss the techniques of chip design using programmable devices. 1,3,4,5,6
5. Design the digital system using Hardware Description Language. 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites: ECB4202
MODULE 1 – CMOS TECHNOLOGY (9L+3T)
MOS transistor, CMOS logic‐ Inverter, NAND gate, NOR gate, logic gates, compound gates, Pass
transistors and Transmission gates, multiplexers, CMOS Fabrication and Layout‐ Inverter fabrication
process, Layout design rules, Gate layouts and Stick diagram.
MODULE 2 – MOS TRANSISTOR THEORY (9L+3T)
MOS transistor introduction, Long channel I‐V characteristics, Non ideal I‐V characteristics, DC
transfer characteristics, Delay‐ Elmore delay model, Power‐ Sources of power dissipation, Dynamic
power and Static power.
MODULE 3 – COMBINATIONAL AND SEQUENTIAL LOGIC CIRCUITS (9L+3T)
Examples of combinational circuit, Static and dynamic latches and registers, Timing issues, Pipelines,
Clock strategies, Memory and memory control circuits, Synchronous and Asynchronous design.
MODULE 4 – ASIC AND FPGA ARCHITECTURE (9L+3T)
CMOS chip design options‐Full custom ASICs, Std. Cell based ASICs, Gate Array based ASICs
Channeled, Channel less and structured GA, FPGA, Fusible link technologies, Anti‐fuse technologies,
Mask programmable devices, PROM’s, EPROM, EEPROM, FLASH, SRAM‐ based technologies, Fine‐,
medium‐ & coarse‐grained architectures.
MODULE 5 – VERILOG HDL (9L+3T)
Basic Concepts: Identifiers, gate primitives, value set, ports, gate delays, structural gate level and
switch level modeling, Design hierarchies, Behavioral and RTL modeling: Operators, timing controls,
Procedural assignments conditional statements, Data flow modeling and RTL.
TEXT BOOKS
1. CMOS VLSI Design A Circuits and Systems Perspective, Fourth Edition by Neil H.E. Weste,
David Money Harris, 2011.
2. M.J. Smith, ―Applica on specific integrated circuits‖, Addisson Wesley, 1997.

118
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

3. Samir Palnitkar; Verilog HDL ‐ Guide to Digital design and synthesis, III edition, Pearson
Education, 2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jan Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, B.Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design
Perspective”, Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.
2 A.Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, “BASIC VLSI Design”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of India,
2007.
3 Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”,
Prentice Hall of India 2005.
E BOOKS
1 https://www.pinterest.com/pin/348677196134415137/

2 http://www.freebookcentre.net/electronics‐ebooks‐download/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101058/

2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092/2

COURSE TITLE RF AND MICROWAVE ENGINEERING CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4402 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL - 4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Gain knowledge of transmission lines and waveguide structures and usage of
1. 1,6,7,10
elements in impedance matching and filter circuits.
Apply the concepts of reciprocity, scattering matrix in Microwave Components,
1,2,4,6,1
2. calculate resonance frequencies and Q‐value for open‐ or short‐circuited
transmission line resonators. 2

Apply analysis methods to determine circuit properties of passive or active 1,2,3,4,6

3.
microwave devices. ,12
1,2,6,7,1
4. Understand the concept of microwave high frequency and broadband amplifiers.
2
Leverage the measurement techniques of various microwave parameters and
5. 2,3,4,8
experimental setup.
Prerequisites: Transmission Lines and Waveguides
MODULE 1 – RF COMPONENTS AND FILTERS (7L+3T)
Transmission Line Transformers , Baluns, Wilkinson Power Dividers/Combiners, Couplers; Filter
Design; Microwave applications, relation between dB, dBm, dBw.

119
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 2 – MICROWAVE NETWORK ANALYSIS AND WAVEGUIDE COMPONENTS (7L+3T)

Impedance and Admittance Matrices, The Scattering Matrix, Power Waves and Generalized
Scattering Parameters , Three‐Port Networks (T‐Junctions), Basic Properties of Dividers and Couplers,
Ferrites— Composition and Characteristics, Faraday Rotation, Ferrite Components — Gyrator,
Isolator, Circulator.
MODULE 3 – MICROWAVE DEVICES (10L+3T)
Microwave Tubes: Klystron, TWT, Magnetron; Schottky Diodes and Detectors, PIN Diodes and
Control Circuits, Varactor Diodes, Heterojunction Bipolar Transistor, High Electron Mobility
Transistor, Avalanche Transit Time (ATT) Devices, Transfer Electron Devices – GUNN Diode.
MODULE 4 – MICROWAVE HIGH EFFICIENCY BROADBAND AND POWER AMPLIFIER (11L+3T)
Overdriven Class B, Class‐F Circuit Design, Inverse Class F, Class E with Shunt Capacitance Class E with
Finite DC‐Feed Inductance, Bode‐Fano Criterion, Matching Networks with Lumped Elements,
Matching Networks with Mixed Lumped and Distributed Elements, Matching Networks with
Transmission Lines, Power Amplifiers with Lossy Compensation Networks, Broadband Class‐E Power
Amplifiers
MODULE 5 – MICROWAVE COMMUNICATION AND MEASUREMENTS (10L+3T)
Microwave Antennas (parabolic reflector Antennas), RADAR Systems, The RADAR Equation, Types of
RADAR, RADAR Ranging, Theory and Applications of Radiometry, The Dicke Radiometer, Description
of microwave bench, Noise at microwave frequency and measurement of noise figure, Power
measurement, attenuation, frequency, impedance, VSWR, EIRP and Gain Over Noise Temperature
(G/T)
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
Design project in high efficiency power amplifiers
TEXT BOOKS
1. Gottapu Sasi Bhushana Rao "Microwave and Radar Engineering" Pearson Education, 2013
2. Andrei Grebennikov, “RF and Microwave Power Amplifier Design”, McGraw‐Hill Education, 2nd
Ed, 2015
3. Samuel V. Liao “Microwave Devices and Circuits” Pearson, 3rd Edition, 2003
4. A. Das and S.K. Das, “ Microwave Engineering” TMH, 2nd Ed., 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 David M Pozar , Microwave Engineering” Wiley Publications, 4th Ed , 2012
2 R.E. Collin “Foundations for Microwave Engineering” IEEE Press, John Wiley, 2nd Edition,
2002.
3 Matthew M Radmanesh “Advanced RF and Microwave Circuit Design: The Ultimate Guide to
Superior Design”, Author House, 2009
E BOOKS
1. http://www.ibook4u.com/2014/03/microwave‐engineering‐by‐david‐m‐pozar.html
2. https://www.accessengineeringlibrary.com/browse/rf‐and‐microwave‐power‐amplifier‐
design‐second‐edition#fullDetails
MOOC
1 https://www.conted.ox.ac.uk/courses/practical‐rf‐microwave‐design

120
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE INTERNET OF THINGS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECB4403 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Gain knowledge on the definition and usage of the term “The Internet of Things” in
1. 1
different contexts.
Understand and apply the concepts of networking & communication in IoT, Basic
2. 2,6
elements in IoT and embedded computing basics.
Interpret the Edge Architecture Model & Cloud‐Cloud device connectivity in a typical
3. 1,3
IoT system.
Identify the IoT & iCore Reference model, Architecture and the need of privacy in
4. 3,5,8
preserving and sharing of data in IoT for various applications.
Apply the concept of IoT in Industry and also explain the challenges to be taken into
5. 6,12
consideration during the implementation.
Prerequisites: Microcontrollers and Embedded Systems, Computer Networks
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO INTERNET OF THINGS (9L)
The technology of the internet of things, making the internet of things, Elements of an IoT ecosystem,
design principles for connected devices, Web thinking for connected devices
MODULE 2 – NETWORKS AND COMMUNICATION (9L)
Networking Technology, Communication Technology, Processes Data Management, Prototyping
embedded devices, Sensors and actuators, Embedded computing basics, Introduction to ARDUINO,
RASPBERRY PI
MODULE 3 – FOUNDATIONAL ELEMENTS OF AN IOT SOLUTION (9L)
The Edge of the IoT, An Abstract Edge Architecture Model, Device Types, The Cloud
Cloud‐to‐Device Connectivity, Topology of the Cloud Data Normalization and Protocol Translation
MODULE 4 – COMMON ARCHITECTURAL APPROACH FOR IOT EMPOWERMENT (9L)
The IoT Reference Model, IoT Reference Architecture, The iCore Functional architecture, Privacy‐
preserving Sharing of IoT Data
MODULE 5 – IOT APPLICATIONS (9L)
IoT Applications — Value Creation for Industry, Value Creation and Challenges, The Smart Factory
Initiative, Cost‐effective Process Integration of IoT Devices, IoT for Retailing Industry
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
MINI Project in Smart Factory initiative

TEXT BOOKS
1. Ovidiu Vermesan ,Peter Friess “Internet of Things: Converging Technologies for Smart
Environments and Integrated Ecosystems”, 2013 River Publishers
2. Joe Biron and Jonathan Follett “ Foundational Elements of an IoT Solution The Edge, The Cloud,
and Application Development” , 2016 O’Reilly Media, Inc.

121
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Adrian McEwen,Hakim Cassimally “Designing the Internet of Things” 2014 John Wiley and Sons,
Ltd.
E BOOKS
1. https://webofthings.org/2016/04/24/free‐book‐using‐the‐web‐to‐build‐the‐iot/
2. http://spmkck.co.in/Notes/Learning%20Internet%20of%20Things.pdf
3.http://www.qorvo.com/design‐hub/ebooks/internet‐of‐things‐for‐dummies
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105166/
2. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_cs22/preview

COURSE TITLE MACHINE LEARNING AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE CREDITS 4

COURSE CODE ECB4404 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 3-1-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
The meaning of machine learning and various paradigms for knowledge
1. 1,2,3
encoding in computer systems is explored.
The concept of learning patterns from data is introduced and a strong
2. theoretical foundation for understanding the state of the art Machine Learning 1,2,3,4
algorithms is developed.
3. To understand about various supervised and unsupervised learning 1,2,3,4,5,6
4. To know about the fundamentals and search techniques 1,2,3,4
5. To know about the knowledge rules and logic functions in artificial intelligence 3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites: Nil
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO MACHINE LEARNING LANGUAGE (9L+3T)
Idea of Machine learning from data, Classification of problems – Regression and classification,
Supervised and Unsupervised learning, Model representation for single variable, Single variable cost
function, Gradient Decent for Linear Regression, Multivariable model Representation, Multivariable
cost function, Gradient Decent in Practice, Normal Equation and non‐invertibility.
MODULE 2 – LOGISTIC REGRESSION AND NEURAL NETWORKS (9L+3T)
Classification, Hypothesis Representation, Decision Boundary, cost function, Advanced optimization,
Multi‐classification, Problem of Over fitting, Regularization, Non‐linear Hypothesis, Biological neurons,
Model Representation, Intuition for neural Networks, Multiclass classification, Cost function, Back
Propagation Algorithm, Back Propagation Intuition, Weight Initialization, Neural Network Training.
MODULE 3 – SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES AND UNSUPERVISED LEARNING (9L+3T)
Optimization Objective, Large Margin classifiers, Kernels, SVM practical, Consideration, Unsupervised
learning introduction, k‐means Algorithm, Optimization objective, Random Initialization, choosing

122
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

number clusters, Problem Formulation, Content based recommendations, Collaborative Filters,

Vectorization, Implementation Details.
MODULE 4 – FUNDAMENTALS AND SEARCH TECHNIQUES (9L+3T)
Defining Artificial Intelligence, Defining AI Techniques, defining problems as state space search,
Production Systems and characteristics, Hill climbing, Breadth first and depth first search, Best first
search, Representations and Mapping, Approaches to knowledge representation.
MODULE 5 – PREDICATE LOGIC, KNOWLEDGE RULES AND SYMBOLIC LOGIC (9L+3T)
Representing simple facts in logic, Computable functions and predicates, Procedural vs Declarative
knowledge, Logic programming, Forward vs Backward reasoning, Non Monotonic reasoning, Logics for
Non‐monotonic reasoning.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Tom M. Mitchell, “Machine Learning”, McGraw‐Hill Science/Engineering/Math; 1997.
2. Staurt Russel, Peter Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach”, Pearson New
International Edition, 2014.
3. Rich and Knight. “Artificial Intelligence”: 2nd Edition, 1992.
4. Richert and Coelho, “Building Machine Learning System with Python”, 2013.

123
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE VLSI DESIGN LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4431 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Understand the concept of basic Verilog HDL 1,2,5,6
2. Design the Combinational and Sequential Circuits using HDL 1,2,5,6
3. Design the advanced digital circuits using HDL 1,2,5,6,9
4. Design, Simulate and extract the layouts of analog IC using EDA tool. 1,2,5,6,11,12
Prerequisites: ECB4202
FPGA Based Experiments:
1. HDL based Design entry and Simulation using Combinational Logic Circuits
2. Synthesis, Area, Power and Timing report generation using Sequential Circuits
3. Verilog implementation of carry look ahead adder
4. Design of finite state machines based on Mealy.
5. Design of finite state machines based on Moore.
IC DESIGN EXPERIMENTS: (BASED ON TANNER/CADENCE/EQUIVALENT)
1. Schematic design of transistor level Inverter using CMOS logic
2. Schematic design of transistor level NAND and NOR gates using CMOS logic
3. Schematic design of 4:1 Multiplexer using Pass Transistor
4. Schematic design of D‐Latch and D‐Flip Flop
5. Layout design of CMOS Inverter
MATLAB ASSIGNMENTS
1. FPGA Implementation of an LTE Receiver Design
2. Modeling HDL Components for FPGAs in Control Applications
3. Design and Verification of FPGA and ASIC Applications
TEXT BOOKS
1 Neil Weste and David Harris, “CMOS VLSI Design: A Circuits and Systems Perspective”, 4th
Edition, Tata McGraw Hill, 2010
2 M.J. Smith, ―Applica on specific integrated circuits‖, Addisson Wesley, 1997
3 Samir Palnitkar; Verilog HDL ‐ Guide to Digital design and synthesis, III edition, Pearson Education,
2003.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Jan Rabaey, Anantha Chandrakasan, B.Nikolic, “Digital Integrated Circuits: A Design Perspective”,
Second Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2003.\
2 A.Pucknell, Kamran Eshraghian, “BASIC VLSI Design”, Third Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
3 Jacob Baker, Harry W.LI., David E.Boyee, “CMOS Circuit Design, Layout and Simulation”, Prentice
Hall of India 2005.
E BOOKS
1 https://www.pinterest.com/pin/348677196134415137/
2 http://www.freebookcentre.net/electronics‐ebooks‐download/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101058/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106092/2

124
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL LAB CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4432 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-3-0
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL -5
Prerequisites: - Optical communication, RF and Microwave fundamentals
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Understand the line coding techniques in optical systems 1,2,5,6,12
2 Understand Dispersion in optical fiber systems and the compensation techniques 1,2,5,6,12
3 Understand WDM Systems and usage of EDFA 1,2,5,6
4 Understand LED and Photodiode characteristics 1,2,5,6
5 Understand nonlinear effects in optical fiber systems 1,2,5,6
6 Analyze the characteristics of RF components and S parameters using RF tool box 1,2,5,6
7 Understand the characteristics of microwave sources and waveguide components 1,2,3,6
8 Understand the radiation parameters of microstrip patch antenna. 1,2,3
9 Analyze transmitter parameters using RF budget analyzer App 1,2,5,6,9
LIST OF EXPERIMENTS
1. Comparison of NRZ, RZ, CRZ and CSRZ modulations using Optsim Software
2. Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM) link using Optsim Software
3. Gain Characteristics of EDFA amplifier using Optsim Software
4. Effect of ISI on BER study using Optsim Software
5. Characteristics of Photodiode ‐ Hardware
6. Characteristics of LED ‐Hardware
7. Fiber optic links – Hardware
8. Introduction to microwave measurements:
 Detection of RF power
 Measurement of SWR and Impedance of an unknown load
 S‐parameter calculation for RF component networks using RF Toolbox
9. To plot the S‐ parameters of Two Port Network for the given frequency using MATLAB
10. Obtain Power coupling using directional coupler
11. Study of Reflex Klystron Repeller mode characteristics
12. Study of GUNN Diode characteristics
13. Study of radiation pattern of Microstrip patch antenna
14. Radio‐frequency characteristics of components using RF toolbox
Analyzing gain and noise figure of transmitters using RF budget analyzer App.
TEXT BOOKS
1 Gerd Keiser, “Optical Fiber Communication” McGraw –Hill International, 4th ed., 2009.

125
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

2 Annapurna Das, Sisir K. Das “Microwave Engineerin”, Tata McGraw‐Hill Education, 2000.
REFERENCES
1 G.P Agrawal, “Fiber‐Optic Communication Systems” , Wiley; Third edition, 2007
EBOOK
1 https://www.intechopen.com/books/optical‐communication
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117104127/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101054/

COURSE TITLE DESIGN PROJECT – V CREDITS 1

COURSE CODE ECB4433 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-2-1
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant
3. 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
application
Prerequisites: ECB4342, ECB4401,ECB4402, ECB4403, ECB4404, MATLAB, MULTISIM, TANNER TOOL
LAB / MINI PROJECT
In this project, each team with maximum of five members is expected to design and develop practical
solutions to real life problems related to Industry and Information Technology research. Software usage
should be followed during the development. The theoretical knowledge gained from the subject in the
current and previous semesters should be applied to develop effective solutions to various applications.
At the end of the course the group should submit a complete report of the project work carried out.
Assessment is made as follows
Assessment Model: LE
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 20%
Third Review & Demo 35%
Report 15%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%

126
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

SEMESTER - VIII

COURSE TITLE PROJECT AND VIVA VOCE CREDITS 8

COURSE CODE ECB4441 COURSE CATEGORY PC L-T-P-S 0-0-24-11
CIA 80% ESE 20%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Identify and work for the real life needs of the society 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
2. Give practical solutions to the societal problem 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
Realize the importance of Engineering concepts and its relevant 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12
3.
application
Prerequisites: All core courses
The Project Work shall be carried out in the field of Electronics & Communication Engineering.
Students shall work in convenient groups of not more than four members in a group. Every Project
Work shall have a Supervisor. During this period the supervisor shall guide the students to implement
the Project. The students shall give periodical presentations of the progress made in the Project Work.
Each group shall finally produce a report covering background information, literature survey,
problem statement, Project work details and conclusions. This final report shall be typewritten form as
specified in the guidelines.
Assessment Model: LF
Review / Exam Weightage
First Review 10%
Second Review 10%
Third Review & Demo 40%
Report 20%
Final Viva‐ Voce 20%
TOTAL 100%

127
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENTAL ELECTIVES
SEMESTER III
COURSE TITLE LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN WITH VHDL CREDITS 3
COURSE CODE ECC4251 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. To design hazards free digital circuits 1,2,3,4
2. To analyze the design issues of specified sequential functions 1,2,3,4,5
To understand the need and role of programmable devices in system design
3. 1,2,4,6
field
4. To understand the design parameters of VHDL language 1,2,3,4,5
5. To apply VHDL concepts to design digital logics 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites: Digital Electronics
MODULE 1 – REALIZATION OF HAZARD FREE DIGITAL FUNCTIONS (9L)
Hazards in combinational circuits. Design of hazard free combinational logics. Set up and Hold time
concepts in Flip flop. Excitation tables, conversion from one type to another, Application of flip flops
to design synchronous and asynchronous counters. Design of hazard free sequential circuits.
MODULE 2 – DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF SEQUENTIAL FUNCTIONS (9L)
Structure of sequential circuits: Moore and Melay machines. Analysis of sequential circuits: State
tables, state diagrams and timing diagrams. FSM techniques to design the sequential functions
(counting, sequence generation, and sequence detection)
MODULE 3 – CHARACTERSTICS AND USE OF PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC DEVICES (9L)
Programmable Logic Devices: Architecture and characteristics of ROM, PLA and PALs‐
Implementation of Logic functions using programmable devices‐ CPLD, ASIC and Gate arrays
introduction‐ FPGA architecture and applications
MODULE 4 – VHDL DESIGN CONCEPTS (9L)
Introduction to Hardware description languages‐ Data types and objects‐ operators‐ type of delays‐
Entity and Architectural declaration‐ VHDL Modelling styles – Dataflow, Structural and Behavioral
MODULE 5 – DESIGN OF LOGIC SYSTEM USING VHDL (9L)
Design of basic combinational and sequential circuit models using the necessary VHDL Data flow and
sequential statements. Basic components of a computer, Architecture of a simple microcomputer
system. Design of a simple computing system with CPLDs.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Morris Mano, “Digital design”, 5 th Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2012
2. Parag K. Lala, “Digital System Design Using Programmable Logic Devices” first Edition, BS
Publications/BSP Books (2003)
3. Charles Roth, “ Digital System Design using VHDL” ,Tata McGraw Hill 2nd edition, 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Albert Paul Malvino, Donald P Leach, Gautam Saha, “Digital Principles and Applications”, 7
Edition‐ Tata McGraw ‐ Hill Education ,2011
2 John M. Yarbrough, “Digital logic: Applications and Design”, Thomas – Vikas Publishing House,
2002.

128
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

3 R.P.Jain, “Modern digital Electronics”,4th Edition, TMH, 2010.

E BOOKS
1 https://www.researchgate.net/publication/264005171_Digital_Electronics
2 http://free‐ebook‐download‐links.blogspot.in/2008/08/free‐books‐on‐digital‐electronics.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117106086/1
2 https://www.openlearning.com/courses/SKEE1223x

COURSE TITLE BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4252 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Ability to explain the basic concept of single phase and three phase circuit with
1. 1,2,3
safety precautions
Ability to explain the concept of DC machines and their performance
2. 1,2,3,5
characteristics.
Ability to explain the basic concept ,construction, principle, working,
3. 1,2,3,5
characteristics of single phase induction motor and its types application
Ability to explain the concept of induction machines, synchronous machines, their
4. 1,2,3,5
performance characteristics and applications.
Ability to explain the basic concept of single phase and three phase circuit with
5. 1,2,3
safety precautions
Prerequisites: Higher secondary mathematical concepts such as solution of ordinary differential
equations, calculus, Physics fundamentals.
MODULE 1 – HOUSE WIRING & SAFETY (9L)
Single phase and three phase system – phase, neutral and earth, basic house wiring ‐ tools and
components, different types of wiring – staircase, florescent lamp and ceiling fan, basic safety
measures at home and industry.
MODULE 2 – DC MACHINES (9L)
Construction of DC machines – Theory of operation of DC generators – Characteristics of DC
generators‐ Operating principle of DC motors – Types of DC motors and their characteristics –
Speed control of DC motors‐ Applications.
MODULE – 3 : TRANSFORMER (9L)
Introduction – Single phase transformer construction and principle of operation – EMF equation of
transformer‐Transformer no–load phasor diagram –– Transformer on–load phasor diagram ––
Equivalent circuit of transformer – Regulation of transformer –Transformer losses and efficiency‐
All day efficiency –auto transformers.

129
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE – 4 : INDUCTION MACHINES AND SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES (9L)

Principle of operation of three‐phase induction motors – Construction –Types – Equivalent circuit
– Construction of single‐phase induction motors – Types of single phase induction motors – Double
revolving field theory – starting methods ‐ Principles of alternator – Construction details – Types –
Equation of induced EMF – Voltage regulation. Methods of starting of synchronous motors –
Torque equation – V curves – Synchronous motors.
MODULE 5 – ELECTRICAL ENERGY (9L)
Basics of Electrical Energy: Introduction, conventional and non‐conventional sources of Electrical
Energy, Domestic wiring (Introduction, Wiring System at Home, Factors affecting the choice of
wiring system, Types of Wiring, Cleat wiring, CTS wiring or TRS wiring or batten wiring, Metal
sheathed wiring, Casing and capping, Conduit wiring, Typical House Wiring Circuits – Staircase
lighting, Corridor lighting) Basics of Utility Supply ( Knowledge about distribution box, MCB, plug
type, live wire, neutral wire, plate earthing, pipe earthing, working of fluorescent tube,
incandescent bulb, CFL)
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
Nil
TEXT BOOKS
1. D. C. Kulshreshtha, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education Private
Limited, 1st Edition, 2011.
2 D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, 'Electric Machines', Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company
Ltd, Reprint 2008.
3. V. K. Metha & Rohit Metha, 'Principle of Electrical Machines', S. Chand Publishers, 2009.
4. D Kothari, I Nagrath, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Tata Mcgraw Hill Education, 2009.
5. M. S. Sukhija, T. K Nagsarkar, “Basic Electrical Engineering”, Oxford University Press, 2005.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Edward Hughes, Ian Mckenzie Smith, Dr John Hiley, Keith Brown Hughes, “Electrical and
Electronic Technology”, Pearson Publishers, 2016.
2 Hambley, “Electrical Engineering: Principles and Applications”, Phi Learning Pvt. Ltd.,
2016.Del Toro, Vincent "Electrical Engineering Fundamentals", Phi Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2014.

130
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE INSTRUMENTATION ENGINEERING CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4253 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understanding the basic fundamentals of instruments and different types
1. 1,2,3
of electronic instruments
2. Understanding the working of different voltmeters, ammeters, ohmmeters 1,2,3
Understanding about the signals using equipment and measuring of noise
3. 1,2,3,4
is also learnt
Understand different types of instrumentation relevance with modern
4. 1,2,3,4,5,6
technology
5. Understand role of Sensors and transducers in different fields of technology 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
Prerequisites:
MODULE 1 MEASUREMENT, INSTRUMENTATION AND CALIBRATION (9L)
Introduction to instrument and measurement, Scope of instrumentation in Industrial Organization
Generalized instrumentation systems with block diagram representation, Performance
Characteristics‐static and dynamic characteristics. Errors in instrumentation, Calibration and
Standards.
MODULE 2 – MECHANICAL INSTRUMENTATION (9L)
Basics of temperature measurement, Basics of pressure measurement), Basics of force
Measurement, Basics of torque measurement, Basics of flow Measurement
MODULE 3 – ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENTATION (9L)
Passive: Resistive temperature, pressure, strain, displacement transducers, Inductive displacement
thickness transducers, capacitive displacement and moisture transducers.
Active: Piezoelectric (force, pressure, strain), Magneto‐striction transducer, Electrochemical
transducers (reference, pH), electromechanical transducer (Tachometer), electromagnetic flow
meter, photoelectric transducer (volatile, emissive), Digital Tachometer.
MODULE 4 – ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION (9L)
Digital electronic meters: Ammeter, Voltmeter, ohmmeter, Multimeter, CRO’s (Traditional,
Sampling, dual trace, storage),Signal generator, function generator, Spectrum Analyzer.
MODULE 5 - PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION (9L)
Pharmaceutical Industries, Paper and textile Industries, Food processing industries, Aerospace
Industry, Nuclear power industry, Bioprocess Industry, Field instrumentation
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
Nil
TEXT BOOKS
1. Transducers & Instrumentation, by DVS Murthy, PHI 2013,2nd edition.
2. Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation by AK Sawhney; DhanpatRai
and Co., New Delhi, 1985.

131
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Electrical and Electronic Measurement and Instrumentation by JB Gupta; S.K Kataria and
Sons Publishers, New Delhi, 2015.
2 Doeblin & Manek, Measurement Systems, 4/e, McGraw Hill, New York, 1992, 5th edition.
3 H.S Kalsi, Electronic Instrumentation ,McGraw Hill, 4th edition, 2010.
4 D. Patranabis, Sensors and Transducers, PHI, 2nd edition, 2003.
5 Arun K. Ghosh, Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation, PHI, 4th edition, 2012
E BOOKS
1 http://www.kelm.ftn.uns.ac.rs/literatura/si/pdf/Measurement%20Instrumentation%20Sen
sors.pdf
2 https://www.studynama.com/community/threads/electrical‐measurements‐
instrumentation‐pdf‐download‐ebook‐lecture‐notes.325/
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/108105064/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103105064/35
3 http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/108106070/

COURSE TITLE MICROPROCESSOR AND APPLICATIONS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4254 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understand the concepts of microprocessors and 8085 internal architecture
1. 1,2,3,5
and interrupts
2. Understand the 8085 microprocessor instruction set and addressing modes 1,2,3,5
Understand the 8086 microprocessor internal architecture, instruction set and
3. 1,2,3,5
addressing modes
Write assembly language programming for 8086 arithmetic and logical
4. 1,2,3,5,6
operations
5. Understand the 8086 applications, overview of PIC and ARM processors 1,2,3,5,6,12
Prerequisites: Digital Systems
MODULE 1:- 8085 MICROPROCESSOR (9L)
Introduction to Micro Computers, Microprocessors and Assembly Languages ‐ 8085 MPU‐ signals‐
Internal architecture‐ Interrupts
Suggested Reading: 8085 signals and Internal architecture
MODULE 2:- 8085 INSTRUCTION SET (9L)
8085 Instruction set –data transfer instructions‐stack instructions‐I/O instructions‐arithmetic
instructions‐logical instructions‐branch instructions‐machine control instructions‐ Addressing
modes
Suggested Reading: 8085 Instruction set and Addressing modes

132
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 3:- 8086 MICROPROCESSOR (9L)

8086 MPU ‐Functional block diagram –Interrupts – Instruction set‐string instructions‐ Addressing
modes
Suggested Reading: 8086 Internal architecture, Instruction set and addressing modes
MODULE 4:- 8086 ASSEMBLY PROGRAMMING (9L)
8086 Assembly programming‐ arithmetic operations ‐ addition‐ subtraction‐ addition with carry‐
multiplication‐ division‐logical operations‐block transfer of data
Suggested Reading: ‐ 8086 assembly programming for arithmetic and logical operations
MODULE 5:- 8086 APPLICATIONS AND OVERVIEW OF HIGHER PROCESSORS (9L)
8086 applications‐stepper motor speed control‐ keyboard and display interfacing‐introduction to
PIC processor‐ introduction to ARM processor (qualitative analysis)
Suggested Reading: ‐ stepper motor speed control, keyboard and display interfacing and overview
of PIC and ARM Processors
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
Microprocessor Lab
TEXT BOOKS
Ramesh S. Gaonkar, “Microprocessor – Architecture, Programming and Applications with the
1.
8085”, Fifth Edition, Prentice Hall. 2002.
A K Ray and K M Burchandi “Advanced Microprocessor and Peripherals” Tata McGraw Hill –
2.
2006.
REFERENCE BOOKS
A. Mathur, 'Introduction to Microprocessor', Third Edition, Tata McGraw‐Hill Publishing Co.
1.
Ltd., 1993.
2. Embedded Systems: An integrated approach by. Lyla Das, Pearson publication, 2013.
M.A.Mazidi, J.C.Mazidi “Microcontroller and Embedded systems using Assembly & C”, Second
3.
Edition Pearson Education, 2007
E BOOKS
https://books.google.co.in/books/about/Microprocessors_Microcontrollers.html?id=bmkXV
1.
WngTLoC
2. https://www.jntubook.com/microprocessors‐and‐microcontrollers‐textbook‐free‐download/
3. http://www.freebookcentre.net/Electronics/MicroProcessors‐Books.html
4. http://www.sanfoundry.com/best‐reference‐books‐microprocessors‐microcontrollers/
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106108100/
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse‐contents/IISc‐BANG/Microprocessors%20and
2.
%20Microcontrollers/New_index1.html
http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse‐contents/IIT‐KANPUR/microcontrollers/
3.
micro/ui/Course_home1_1.htm
4. http://freevideolectures.com/Course/3018/Microprocessors‐and‐Microcontrollers

133
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES
SEMESTER IV

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4266 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Analyze general terminology of digital image processing 1, 2,3
2. Examine various types of image transformations 1, 2,3,4,5
3. Examine image processing in spatial, frequency domain and restoration techniques 1, 2,3,4,5
4. Perform image compression and decompression 1,3,4,5
Evaluate the methodologies for image segmentation and representation and to
5. 1,3,4,5
apply morphological techniques in images
Prerequisites: Basic understanding of Linear algebra, Statistics and Signal processing.
MODULE 1: DIGITAL IMAGE FUNDAMENTALS (8L)
Fundamental steps in DIP, Components of digital image processing system, Structure of human eye,
Image formation in the eye, Brightness adaptation and discrimination, light, Image sensing and
acquisition, Image formation model, Pixels, Basic relationship between pixels, coordinate conventions,
Imaging Geometry, sampling and quantization, Basic geometric transformations.
Suggested Reading:- Image formation
MODULE 2 – IMAGE TRANSFORMS (7L)
Definition of image transforms, Need for transforms, applications, Two dimensional Fourier
transform, properties, Walsh, Hadamard, Discrete Cosine Transform, Haar, Karhunen – Loeve
transforms.
MODULE 3 – IMAGE ENHANCEMENT AND RESTORATION (10L)
Intensity transformations, contrast stretching, histogram equalization, Spatial filtering: Smoothing
filters, sharpening filters, gradient and Laplacian, Frequency domain filtering, Homomorphic filtering,
Restoration techniques, Noise characterization, Noise restoration filters, Adaptive filters, Inverse
Filtering, MMSE (Wiener) Filtering.
Suggested Reading:‐ Mathematical expressions for Noise models
MODULE 4 – IMAGE COMPRESSION (8L)
Encoder‐Decoder model, Lossy and Lossless compression, Transform Coding, Sub‐image size
selection, blocking artifacts, Run length coding, Bit‐plane encoding, Bit‐allocation, Zonal Coding,
Threshold Coding, JPEG, Lossless predictive coding, Lossy predictive coding.
Suggested Reading:- Predictive coding
MODULE 5 – IMAGE SEGMENTATION AND REPRESENTATION (6L)
Point, line detection, Edge detection, Thresholding, Region‐based segmentation, Boundary
representation: chain codes‐ Polygonal approximation – Boundary segments – boundary descriptors:
Simple descriptors‐Fourier descriptors ‐ Regional descriptors –Simple descriptors‐ Texture.

134
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 6 – MORPHOLOGICAL IMAGE PROCESSING (6L)

Basics, SE, Erosion, Dilation, Opening, Closing, Hole filling, Connected components, convex hull,
thinning, thickening, skeletons and pruning.
LAB / MINI PROJECT / FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Gonzalez & Woods ―Digital Image Processing, 3rd ed., Pearson educa on, 2008
2. Anil K. Jain ―Fundamentals Digital Image Processing, Pren ce Hall India, 2011
REFERENCES
1. Pra W.K ―Digital Image Processing, 3rd ed., John Wiley & Sons, 2007
2. Chanda Dutta Magundar – Digital Image Processing and Applications, Prentice Hall of India,
2000.
3. S. Sridhar ‐ Digital Image Processing, 2nd ed., Oxford University Press, 2016.
E BOOKS
1. http://bookboon.com/en/digital‐image‐processing‐part‐one‐ebook
2. http://bookboon.com/en/digital‐image‐processing‐part‐two‐ebook
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117105079/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105032/
3 http://www.nptelvideos.in/2012/12/digital‐image‐processing.html
4 EGGN 510 ‐ Image and Multidimensional Signal Processing
5 https://www.coursera.org/learn/digital
6 Video lectures by Dr. Mubarak Shah (UCF ‐ Center for Research in Computer Vision) (UCF
Computer Vision Video Lectures 2012)

135
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4267 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL - 5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Know the origin of Bio‐potentials, recording methods of various bio signals 1,2,3,4
2. Know about measurement and analysis of various bio signals 1,2
3. Know about cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Bio‐telemetry 1,2,3
4. Know about Diagnostic x‐ray equipments, Radiation Therapy 1,2,6
Know about Endoscopy unit, Laser in medicine and Electrical safety in medical
5. 1,4,6
equipment
Prerequisites: Nil
MODULE 1 – ELECTRO-PHYSIOLOGY AND BIO-POTENTIAL RECORDING (9L)
The origin of Bio‐potentials; biopotential electrodes, biological amplifiers, ECG, EEG, EMG, PCG, EOG,
lead systems and recording methods, typical waveforms and signal characteristics.
MODULE 2 – BIO-CHEMICAL AND NON ELECTRICAL PARAMETER MEASUREMENT (9L)
PH, PO2, PCO2, PHCO3, Electrophoresis, colorimeter, photometer, Auto analyzer, Blood flow meter,
cardiac output, respiratory measurement, Blood pressure, temperature, pulse, Blood cell counters.
MODULE 3 – ASSIST DEVICES AND BIO-TELEMETRY (9L)
Cardiac pacemakers, DC Defibrillator, Telemetry principles, frequency selection, Bio‐telemetry, radio‐
pill and tele‐stimulation.
MODULE 4 – RADIOLOGICAL EQUIPMENTS (9L)
Ionosing radiation, Diagnostic x‐ray equipments, CT – scanners, use of Radio Isotope in diagnosis,
Radiation Therapy.
MODULE 5 – RECENT TRENDS IN MEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION (9L)
Thermograph, endoscopy unit, Laser in medicine, Diathermy units, Elements of Electrical safety, Built‐
in safety features for medical instruments.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell, Erich A. Pfeiffer, “Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurement”, Prentice Hall India Pvt. Ltd. , New Delhi, 2nd Edition, Reprint, 2013.
2. L.A Geddes and L.E.Baker , “Principles of Applied Biomedical Instrumentation‟ Third Edition,
John Wiley and sons, Reprint 2008.
3. Khandpur R.S, “Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 3rd
Edition, 2014.
4. Albert D.Helfrick and William D.Cooper.“Modern Electronic Instrumentation and
Measurement Techniques”, Prentice Hall of India, 2007.
5. John G.Webster, 'Medical Instrumentation Application and Design', 4th edition, John Wiley
and Sons, New York, 2009.

136
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

E BOOKS
1 https://sites.google.com/site/readpdffreedownload321/download‐pdf‐hb‐of‐
biomedical‐instrumentation‐by‐‐‐r‐s‐khandpur‐read‐online
MOOC
1. http://www.sasurieengg.com/e‐course‐material/ECE/III‐
Year%20Sem%206/EC%202021%20Medical%20Electronics.pdf
2. https://www.accessengineeringlibrary.com/browse/handbook‐of‐biomedical‐
instrumentation‐third‐edition

COURSE TITLE NANO ELECTRONICS AND DEVICES CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4268 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understand various aspects of Nano‐technology and the processes involved in
1. 1
making Nano components and material
2. Gain knowledge on fundamentals of logic devices and classifications 1,2
Leverage the advantages of Silicon MOSFET devices and Quantum transport
3. 1,2,3
tunneling devices
4. Understand the concept of molecular Electronics 1,2,3
5. Analyze various nano fabrication process for different applications 3,4,5,6
Prerequisites : Engineering Physics, Electron Devices
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO NANOTECHNOLOGY (9L)
Background to nanotechnology: Types of nanotechnology and Nano machines – periodic table –
atomic structure – molecules and phases – energy – molecular and atomic size – surface and
dimensional space – top down and bottom up approach; Molecular Nanotechnology: microscope –
atom manipulation – Nano dots. Nanomaterial’s preparation process, aapplications of nanomaterial’s
and Nano Machines
MODULE 2 – FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOELECTRONICS (9L)
Fundamentals of logic devices: dynamic properties – threshold gates; classifications – two terminal
devices – field effect devices – Design of logic gates using nano devices – coulomb blockade devices –
spintronics – quantum cellular automata – quantum computing – DNA computer; performance of
information processing systems: basic binary operations, measure of performance processing
capability of biological neurons – performance estimation for the human brain, ultimate computation.
MODULE 3 – SILICON MOSFETs, QUANTUM TRANSPORT DEVICES & CARBON NANOTUBES (9L)
Silicon MOSFETS: scaling rules – silicon‐dioxide based gate dielectrics – metal gates – junctions &
Contacts. Quantum Transport Devices (QTD) : Electron tunnelling – resonant tunnelling diodes &
devices; Single electron devices for logic applications; Carbon Nanotube: Fullerenes ‐ types of

137
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

nanotubes – formation of nanotubes‐electronic properties – synthesis of carbon nanotubes – carbon

nanotube interconnects – carbon nanotube FETs –Nanotube for memory applications – prospects of
an all carbon nanotube in Nano electronics.
MODULE 4 – MOLECULAR ELECTRONICS (9L)
Electrodes & contacts: functions – molecular electronic devices –fabrication; Random Access Memory
– mass storage devices. Single Molecule Magnet (SMM)‐Conductive Polymer‐Molecular Conductance‐
Molecular logic Gate‐ Molecular Wires‐Molecular Assembler‐Molecular Machine.
MODULE 5 – NANO ENGINEERING DEVICES & NANO LITHOGRAPHY (9L)
Lab‐On‐a‐Chip‐Micro machinery‐Nano Motor‐Nano Pore‐Nano Sensor‐Quantum Point‐ Synthetic
Molecular Motors‐medical Applications of Nano Materials. Dip pen nanolithography‐Electron Beam
Lithography‐Ion Beam Sculpting‐Nano Imprint Lithography‐Photo Lithography
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
‐
TEXT BOOKS
1. Hanson, George W. “Fundamentals of nanoelectronics” , Pearson Education, 2008.
2. Phani Kumar, “Principles of Nano Technology:‐Materials, Tools and Process at Nano Scale”
SCITECH Publications,2017
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Michael Wilson, Kamali Kannangara, Geoff Smith, Michelle Simmons and Burkhard Raguse,
“Nanotechnology: Basic Science and Emerging Technologies” , Chapman & Hall / CRC, 2002
E BOOKS
1. Marcel Van de Voorde, Robert Puers, Livio Baldi, Sebastiaan E van Nooten (Eds)
“Nanoelectronics: Materials, Devices, Applications”, Wiley‐VCH Verlag GmbH & Co., wiley
online library, 2017.
MOOC
1 https://www.edx.org/course/fundamentals‐nanoelectronics‐basic‐purduex‐nano520x
2 https://www.edx.org/course/fundamentals‐nanoelectronics‐part‐b‐purduex‐nano521x

138
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ROBOTICS AND CONTROL CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4269 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Familiar with the history, concept development and key components of robotics
1. 1,2,3
technologies.
Understand basic mathematic manipulations of spatial coordinate representation
2. 1,2,3,4
and transformation.
Understand and able to solve basic robot forward and inverse kinematics
3. 1,2,3,4,5
problems.
Understand and able to solve basic robotic dynamics, path planning and control
4. 1,2,3,4,5
problems.
Able to undertake practical robotics experiments that demonstrate the above
5. 3,4,5,6
skills.
Prerequisites:
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9L)
Automation and Robotics, CAD/CAM and Robotics – An over view of Robotics – present and future
applications – classification by coordinate system and control system.
Components of the Industrial Robotics: Function line diagram representation of robot arms, common
types of arms. Components, Architecture, number of degrees of freedom – Requirements and
challenges of end effectors, determination of the end effectors, comparison of Electric, Hydraulic and
Pneumatic types of locomotion devices.
MODULE 2 – MOTION ANALYSIS I (9L)
Homogeneous transformations as applicable to rotation and translation – problems
Manipulator Kinematics
Specifications of matrices, D‐H notation joint coordinates and world coordinates Forward and inverse
kinematics – problems.
MODULE 3 – MOTION ANALYSIS II (9L)
Differential transformation and manipulators, Jacobians problems. Dynamics: Lagrange – Euler and
Newton – Euler formations – Problems.
Trajectory planning and avoidance of obstacles, path planning, Skew motion, joint integrated motion
– straight line motion – Robot programming, languages and software packages.
MODULE 4 – ROBOT ACTUATORS AND FEEDBACK COMPONENTS (9L)
Actuators: Pneumatic, Hydraulic actuators, electric & stepper motors. Feedback components: position
sensors – potentiometers, resolvers, encoders – Velocity Sensors.
MODULE 5 – ROBOT APPLICATION IN MANUFACTURING (9L)
Material Transfer ‐ Material handling, loading and unloading‐ Processing ‐ spot and continuous arc
welding & spray painting ‐ Assembly and Inspection.

139
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

Nil
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1 Groover M P “Industrial Robotics.” Pearson Edu., 2008
2 .Mittal R K & Nagrath I J “Robotics and Control” TMH., 2003.
3 Fu K S “Robotics” McGraw Hill., 1987.
4 P. Coiffet and M. Chaironze “An Introduction to Robot Technology”, Kogam Page Ltd. 1983
London.
5 Richard D. Klafter, “Robotic Engineering.” Prentice Hall, 1989.
6 John J Craig “Introduction to Robotics” Pearson Edu., 2004.
7 . Mark W. Spong and M. Vidyasagar “Robot Dynamics & Control.” John Wiley & Sons (ASIA)
Pte Ltd., 1989.

140
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVE
SEMESTER V
COURSE TITLE VIRTUAL AND AUGMENTED REALITY CREDITS 3
COURSE CODE ECC4351 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
To get familiarity with state‐of‐the‐art VR/AR technology, its current
1. 1,2,6
limitations and near‐future developments.
To study and experience available VR/AR content and identify what sets VR
2. 1,2,5,12
apart from screen‐based media.
3. To analyze how VR/AR can help to understand and solve complex problems. 1,2,3, 4,6,12
4. To obtain skills to create interactive VR/AR content. 1,2,3, 6,12
To create a VR/AR prototype that has potential value for research and/or 1,2,3,
5.
education. 4,5,6,11,12
MODULE 1: INTRODUCTION (9L)
The three I’s of virtual reality, commercial VR technology and the five classic components of a VR
system.
MODULE 2: INPUT DEVICES AND OUTPUT DEVICES (9L)
Trackers, Navigation, and Gesture Interfaces: Three‐dimensional position trackers, navigation and
manipulation, interfaces and gesture interfaces, Output Devices: Graphics displays, sound displays &
haptic.
MODULE 3: MODELING (9L)
Geometric modeling, kinematics modeling, physical modeling, behavior modeling, model
management.
MODULE 4: HUMAN FACTORS (9L)
Methodology and terminology, user performance studies, VR health and safety issues, Applications:
Medical applications, military applications, robotics applications.
MODULE 5: INTRODUCTION TO MIXED AND AUGMENTED REALITY (9L)
Key concepts and techniques at work in Mixed and Augmented Reality. business aspects of
augmented reality: AR market, the potential applications and the value chain. characteristics of AR
systems, components of an AR architecture.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1. Virtual Reality Technology, Second Edition, Gregory C. Burdea& Philippe Coiffet, John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2003.
2. Killer Game Programming in Java, Andrew Davison, Oreilly‐SPD, 2005.
3. Understanding Virtual Reality, interface, Application and Design, William R.Sherman, Alan Craig,
Elsevier (Morgan Kaufmann), 2018.
4. 3D Modeling and surfacing, Bill Fleming, Elsevier(Morgan Kauffman), 1999.
5. 3D Game Engine Design, David H.Eberly, Elsevier, 2006.
6. Virtual Reality Systems, John Vince, Pearson Education, 1995.

141
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4352 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Know about the trends in automobiles, electromagnetic principle, security and
1. 1,2,6
warning systems.
Know about the Electronic management of chassis systems and operation of
2. 1,2,3,6,12
different sensors.
3. Know about the Electronic ignition systems principles, types and operation. 1,2,3,6,12
Know about the recent advances in embedded automotive systems and 1,2,3,5,6,
4.
multiprocessor communication. 11,12
1,2,3,4,5,
5. Know about the real time development of embedded automotive systems.
6,9,11,12
Prerequisites: NIL
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMOBILES (9L)
Current trends in Automobiles, open loop and closed loop systems ‐ components for electronic
engine management system. Electromagnetic interference suppression. Electromagnetic
Compatibility, Electronic dashboard instruments‐ predictive maintenance, onboard diagnostic system,
security and warming system.
MODULE2–ELECTROCHASSISSYSTEMS (9L)
Electronic management of chassis systems; Vehicle motion control, Sensors and actuators and their
interfacing. Basic sensor arrangement, types of sensors such as‐ oxygen sensors, crank angle position
sensors‐ Fuel metering/ vehicle speed sensors and destination sensors, Flow sensor, exhaust
temperature, air mass flow sensors, throttle position sensor, MEMS –Gyroscope Sensor, solenoids,
stepper motors and relays.
MODULE 3 – ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEMS (9L)
Electronic ignition systems; Types of solid state ignition systems and their principle of operation;
Digital engine control system, Open loop and closed loop control system, Engine Cranking and warm
up control, Acceleration enrichment, Deceleration learning and ideal speed Control, Distributor less
ignition – Integrated engine control system, Exhaust emission control Engineering
MODULE 4 – EMBEDDED AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS (9L)
Atmel Family (Raspberry –pi ) Microcontroller, Recent advances‐ GLS, GPS, IoT and GSM;
Multiprocessor communication using CAN bus,I2C.
MODULE 5 – REAL TIME STUDY OF AUTOMOTIVE SYSTEMS (9L)
Case study‐ Adaptive cruise control of car, Embedded Airbag System, Embedded Based Automatic
Parking System, Embedded Rain‐Sensing System, Artificial Intelligence and engine management.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA

142
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, 5th Edition, Butterworth
Hennimann Woburn, 1998.
2. Young A.P. & Griffiths, “Automotive Electrical Equipment”, ELBS & New Press‐ 1999.
3. Tom Weather Jr. & Cland c. Ilunter, “Automotive computers and control system” Prentice
Hall Inc., New Jersey.
4. Neil kolban” Kolban’s book on Raspberry –pi “ 1st edition Aug 2016
5. Crouse W.H., “Automobile Electrical Equipment”, Mc Graw Hill Co. Inc., New York, 1995.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Bechhold, “Understanding Automotive Electronic”, SAE, 1998.
2. Robert Bosch,” Automotive Hand Book”, SAE (5th Edition), 2000.
3. Rajkamal, Embedded Systems Architecture, Programming and Design, TATA McGraw‐Hill,
Second Edition‐2009.
E BOOKS
1. https://www.edgefx.in/importance‐of‐embedded‐systems‐in‐automobiles‐with‐
applications/
2. energietest.deatleetfabriek.nl/micro_electromechanical_system_mems_sensor.pdf
3. engineersevanigam.blogspot.com/.../embedded-systems-by-raj-kamal-ebook-pdf.html
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/112108092/module5/lec39.pdf
2 https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6CLANV6M2CM
3 nptel.ac.in/courses/117105082/
4 nptel.ac.in/courses/112103174/3

143
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4353 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Familiar with CISC, RISC and ARM Design Philosophy 1,2,6
2. Understand architecture of ARM cortex M3 processor 1,2,3,6,12
3. Understand instruction set of ARM processor 1,2,3,6,12
Write C programs for ARM microprocessor and Interface input/output devices like 1,2,3,4,5,6
4.
UART,I2C and LCD ,9,12
Understand Advanced Microprocessor Bus Architecture, Exception handling and 1,2,3,4,5,6
5.
optimization techniques ,9,12
Prerequisites: Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcontrollers
MODULE 1:- RISC PHILOSOPHY (9L)
Advanced microprocessors‐CISC‐ RISC‐ Design philosophy‐ ARM processor‐ History‐ Design Philosophy
Suggested Reading:-CISC, RISC and ARM Design Philosophy
MODULE 2:-ARM ARCHITECTURE (9L)
Acorn RISC Machine‐ Core data flow model‐ARM cortex M3 Architecture‐ programmer’s model:
General purpose registers‐ Link register‐special registers‐operation modes‐ memory map‐
development tools
Suggested Reading:- ARM cortex M3 Architecture, programmer’s model and development tools
MODULE 3:-ARM INSTRUCTION SET (9L)
Data processing instructions‐ Arithmetic‐logical instructions‐Shift instructions‐Flow Control
Instructions‐Branch instructions‐ Data Transfer Instructions‐Load and store instructions, Software
interrupt instructions‐ Program status register instructions‐ Conditional execution‐ Stack instructions‐
Thumb instruction set‐ advantages
Suggested Reading:- ARM Instruction Set, Thumb instruction set
MODULE 4:-C PROGRAMMING (9L)
C compiler‐data types‐functions‐pointers‐looping structures‐register allocations‐portability issues‐
programming‐ARM interfacing‐UART‐ I2C‐LCD
Suggested Reading: - C compiler, Programming and interfacing
MODULE 5:-BUS ARCHITECTURE (9L)
Advanced microprocessor bus architecture (AMBA)‐bus system‐user peripherals‐exception handling‐
optimization techniques
Suggested Reading: - Bus Architecture, exception handling and optimization techniques
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Arm System Developer’s Guide, Designing and Optimizing Software, Andrew N. Sloss,
Dominic Symes, Chris Wright, Elsevier, First edition, March, 2004.

144
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

2. Arm System‐on‐chip Architecture, 2nd Edition, Steve Furber, Pearson publication, March,
2000.
3. Arm Assembly Language, Fundamentals and Techniques, 2nd edition, William Hohl,
Christopher Hinds, CRC Press, 2015.
REFERENCE BOOKS
ARM Assembly Language Programming & Architecture by Muhammad
1.
Ali Mazidi,2nd Edition, August, 2013.
2. Embedded Systems: An integrated approach by. Lyla Das, Pearson publication, 2013.
3. The Definitive Guide to the ARM® Cortex‐M3 by Joseph Yiu,Elsevier, Second Edition, 2010.
E BOOKS
1. https://developer.arm.com/support/arm‐books
2. https://developer.mbed.org
http://www.freescale.com/tools/software‐and‐tools/hardware‐development‐
3.
tools/freedom‐development‐boards:FREDEVPLA
MOOC
1. http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/117106111/
2. http://www.electronicshub.org/arm‐tutorial/
3. http://www.embeddedcraft.org/armtutorials.html

COURSE TITLE PATTERN RECOGNITION CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4354 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Have the fundamental knowledge on pattern Recognition System 1,2,6
2. Have a strong foundation on Statistical Pattern recognition 1,2,3,4,6
3. Explain the concept on syntactic recognition via Parsing 1,2,3,4,6,12
Understand the concept on pattern recognition Systems with NN
4. 1,2,3,4,5,6,12
approaches
5. Understand the Applications of Image Processing in Medical Field 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,11,12
Prerequisites: Basic Mathematics - Probability
MODULE 1 – PATTERN RECOGNITION OVERVIEW AND BAYESIAN DECISION THEORY (9L)
Pattern recognition, Classification and Description‐ Patterns and feature Extraction‐Training and
Learning in PR systems – Bayesian decision theory – continuous and discrete features – minimum error
rate – classifiers, discriminant functions for normal densities – Error probability – Error bounds –
Bayesian belief networks ‐ Pattern recognition approaches ‐Statistical, Syntactic, Neural pattern
recognition – other approaches to PR

Suggested reading‐ Normal distribution, calculation of mean and variance

145
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 2 – STATISTICAL PATTERN RECOGNITION (9L)

Introduction to statistical Pattern Recognition ‐ supervised Learning using Parametric and Non
Parametric Approaches. Linear Discriminant Functions Introduction—Discrete and binary Classification
problems—Techniques to directly Obtain Linear Classifiers

Suggested reading‐ Parametric and Nonparametric approaches

MODULE 3 – SYNTACTIC PATTERN RECOGNITION (9L)
Overview of Syntactic Pattern Recognition— Syntactic recognition via parsing and other Grammars–
Graphical Approaches to syntactic pattern recognition—learning via grammatical Inference.

Suggested reading‐ Syntactic structures

MODULE 4 – NEURAL PATTERN RECOGNITION (9L)
Introduction to Neural networks—Feedforward Networks and training by Back Propagation—Content
Addressable Memory Approaches and Unsupervised Learning in Neural PR.

Suggested reading‐ Basics on Neural networks

MODULE 5 – APPLICATIONS AND CASE STUDIES (9L)
Web Applications – Audio and Video Analysis – Medical Applications – Image processing –Financial
Applications ‐ Related case studies

Suggested reading‐ Machine learning

TEXT BOOKS
1. Robert Schalkoff, “pattern Recognition: statistical, structural and neural approaches”,
JohnWiley &sons , Inc, 2007.
2. R. Duda, P.Hart, and D.Stork, Pattern Classification, 2nd edition, John Wiley, New York,2001.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Chen C H, “Handbook of pattern recognition and computer vision”, 4 th edition world
scientific co, Pvt. Ltd., 2010
2 Christoper M Bishop, “Neural Network for pattern recognition”, Oxford university press, 2008
3 Earl Gose, Richard Johnsonbaugh, Steve Jost, “Pattern Recognition and Image Analysis”,
Prentice Hall of India, Pvt Ltd, 1996.
4 R.O. Duda, P.E. Hart & D.G Stork, “Pattern Classification 2 nd Edition”, J.Wiley Inc, 2001.
5 Geoff Dougherty, “Pattern Recognition and classification: An introduction”, Springer 2013
MOOC
1 https://www.igi‐global.com/book/pattern‐ recognition‐technologies‐
applications/834
2 http://dspace.mit.edu/handle/1721.1/41935
3 https://searchworks.stanford.edu/view/4250919

146
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES
SEMESTER VI

COURSE TITLE MOBILE COMMUNICATION CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4366 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Study of evolution of mobile communication and cellular concepts 1,2,3,7,8
Understand different indoor and outdoor propagation models related to
2. 1,3,4,7,8,11
losses and different types of fading
3. Understand the modulation Techniques and Multiple Access Schemes 1,2,3
4. Understand the Equalization Techniques and Receiver types 1,2,3,4
5. Understand the Coding Techniques and System Examples 1,2,3,4
Prerequisites: Basic concepts of Analog and Digital Communication
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND CELLULAR CONCEPT (9L)
Overview to wireless communication: Evolution & Generation of mobile communication. Existing
mobile communication technology and current Status. Cellular Concept: Frequency reuse, channel
assignment, hand off, Interference and system Capacity, tracking and grade of service, Improving
Coverage and capacity in Cellular systems
MODULE 2 – MOBILE RADIO PROPAGATION (9L)
Free space propagation model, reflection, diffraction, scattering, link budget design, Outdoor
Propagation models, Indoor propagation models, Small scale Multipath propagation, Impulse
Model, Small scale Multipath measurements, parameters of Mobile multipath channels, types of
Small scale fading, statistical models for multipath fading channels.
MODULE 3 – MODULATION TECHNIQUES AND MULTIPLE ACCESS SCHEMES (9L)
Modulation schemes: MSK, GMSK, M‐ary QAM, M‐ary FSK, multi carrier modulation, OFDM,
Performance of Digital Modulation in Slow‐Flat Fading Channels and Frequency Selective Mobile
Channels.
Multiple Access Schemes: FDMA,TDMA,CDMA and SDMA
MODULE 4 – EQUALIZATION AND RECEIVER STRUCTURE (9L)
Survey of equalization Techniques, Linear Equalization, Non‐linear Equalization, Algorithms for
Adaptive qualization ,DiversityReceiver, RAKE receiver.
MODULE 5 – CODING TECHNIQUES AND SYSTEM EXAMPLES (9L)
Coding: Vocoders, Linear Predictive Coders, Selection of Speech Coders for Mobile Communication,
GSM Codec, RS codes for CDPD,System examples‐ GSM, EDGE, GPRS, IS‐95, CDMA 2000 and WCDMA.
TEXT BOOKS
1. T.S.Rappaport, “Wireless Communications: Principles and Practice, Second Edition, Pearson
Education/ Prentice Hall of India, Second Edition 2013

147
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

2. Jochen Schiller, Mobile Communications, Person Education – 2003, 2nd Edn

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 R. Blake, “ Wireless Communication Technology”, Thomson Delmar, 2003.
2 W.C.Y.Lee, "Mobile Communications Engineering: Theory and applications, Second Edition,
McGraw‐Hill International, 1998.
3 Stephen G. Wilson, “ Digital Modulation and Coding”, Pearson Education, 1995.
E BOOKS
1 www.freebookcentre.net/mobile.../Lecture‐Notes‐on‐Mobile‐Communication. html
MOOC
1 nptel.ac.in/courses/117102062/38
2 http://ggn.dronacharya.info/ECEDept/Downloads/QuestionBank/VIIsem/NPTEL_LINKS_M
OBILE_COMM.pdf

COURSE TITLE INFORMATION CODING TECHNIQUES CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4367 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Ability to analyze and design complex electronic circuits. 1,2,3
2. Ability to identify, formulate and solve engineering problems. 1,2,3,4
3. An ability to design a system component or process to meet desired needs. 1,2,3
An ability to identify the type of problem, decides the appropriate method of
4. 1,2,3
solution, formulate the solution and solve the problem.
Ability to use the techniques, skills and modern engineering tools necessary for
5. 4,5,6
engineering practice.
Prerequisites:
MODULE 1 – INFORMATION THEORY (9L)
Introduction, Measure of information, Average information content of symbols in long independent
sequences, Average information content of symbols in long dependent sequences. Mark‐off
statistical model for information source, Entropy and information rate of mark‐off source.

Source Coding: Encoding of the source output, Shannon’s encoding algorithm. Shannon’s Fano
Coding, Communication Channels, Discrete communication channels, Continuous channels.
MODULE 2 – FUNDAMENTAL LIMITS ON PERFORMANCE (9L)
Source coding theorem, Huffman coding, discrete memory less Channels, Mutual information,
Channel Capacity, Shannon’s Hartley law and its implications.

148
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 3 – CHANNEL CODING (9L)

Channel coding theorem, Differential entropy and mutual information for continuous ensembles,
Channel capacity Theorem,
Introduction to Error Control Coding: Introduction, Types of errors, examples, Types of codes Linear
Block Codes: Matrix description, Error detection and correction, Standard arrays and table look up
for decoding.
MODULE 4 – CYCLIC CODES (9L)
Algebraic structures of cyclic codes, Encoding using an (n‐k) bit shift register, Syndrome calculation.
BCH codes. RS codes, Golay codes, shortened cyclic codes, Burst error correcting codes, Burst and
Random Error correcting codes.
MODULE 5 – CONVOLUTIONAL CODES (9L)
Concept and definitions, properties of convolutional codes, encoding of convolution codes, Time
domain approach. Transform domain approach, Viterbi algorithm, Trellis Diagram.
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NIL
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1 K. Sam Shanmugam, “Digital and analog communication systems”, John Wiley, 1996.
2 Simon Haykin, “Digital communication”, John Wiley, 2003.
3 Ranjan Bose, “ITC and Cryptography”, TMH, II Edition, 2007
4 Glover and Grant; “Digital Communications” Pearson Edition, 2nd Edition, 2008
5 Dr. P.S. Satyanarayana, “Concepts of Information theory and Coding”, Dynaram Publication,
2005
6 S. Haykin, “Communication Systems”, John Wiley & Sons, 2004.
7 Thomas M. Cover & Joy A. Thomas “Elements Of Information Theory”, 2nd Edition, Wiley
India Pvt Ltd ., 2006.
8 Richard. B. Wells, “Applied Coding and Information Theory for engineers’’ Pearson
education, 2nd edition, 2009.
9 G. A. Jones and J.M. Jones, “Information and coding theory” Springer, 2nd edition, 2002

149
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE WIRELESS ADHOC SENSOR NETWORK CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4368 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL – 4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Explain the concepts, network architectures and applications of ad hoc and
1. 1,2,3,4,7
wireless sensor networks
2. Analyze the protocol design issues of ad hoc and sensor networks 1,2,3,4,5
Design routing protocols for ad hoc and wireless sensor networks with respect to
3. 1,2,3,4,5
some protocol design issues
4. Explain the components of wireless sensor networks 1,2,3,4,5
Evaluate the QoS related performance measurements of ad hoc and sensor
5. 1,2,3,4,5
networks
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9L)
Fundamentals of Wireless Communication Technology – The Electromagnetic Spectrum –
Radio propagation Mechanisms – Characteristics of the Wireless Channel ‐mobile ad
hoc networks (MANETs) and wireless sensor networks (WSNs) :concepts and architectures.
Applications of Ad Hoc and Sensor networks. Design Challenges in Ad hoc and Sensor Networks.
MODULE 2 – MAC PROTOCOLS FOR AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS (9L)
Issues in designing a MAC Protocol‐ Classification of MAC Protocols‐ Contention based
protocols‐ Contention based protocols with Reservation Mechanisms‐ Contention based protocols
with Scheduling Mechanisms – Multi channel MAC‐IEEE 802.11
MODULE 3 – ROUTING PROTOCOLS AND TRANSPORT LAYER IN AD HOC WIRELESS NETWORKS (9L)
Issues in designing a routing and Transport Layer protocol for Ad hoc networks‐ proactive
routing, reactive routing (on‐demand), hybrid routing‐ Classification of Transport Layer solutions‐TCP
over Ad hoc wireless Networks.
MODULE 4 –WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORKS AND MAC PROTOCOLS (9L)
Single node architecture: hardware and software components of a sensor node ‐ WSN
Network architecture: typical network architectures‐data relaying and aggregation strategies ‐MAC
layer protocols: self‐organizing, Hybrid TDMA/FDMA and CSMA based MAC‐ IEEE 802.15.4.
MODULE 5 – WSN ROUTING, LOCALIZATION & QOS (9L)
Issues in WSN routing – OLSR‐ Localization – Indoor and Sensor Network Localization‐absolute
and relative localization, triangulation‐QOS in WSN‐Energy Efficient Design‐Synchronization‐
Transport Layer issues.
TEXT BOOKS
1. C. Siva Ram Murthy, and B. S. Manoj, "Ad Hoc Wireless Networks: Architectures and
Protocols ", Prentice Hall Professional Technical Reference, 2008.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1. Carlos De Morais Cordeiro, Dharma Prakash Agrawal “Ad Hoc & Sensor Networks: Theory
and Applications”, World Scientific Publishing Company, 2006.

150
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

2. Feng Zhao and Leonides Guibas, "Wireless Sensor Networks", Elsevier Publication ‐ 2002.
3. Holger Karl and Andreas Willig “Protocols and Architectures for Wireless Sensor
Networks”, Wiley, 2006.
4. Kazem Sohraby, Daniel Minoli, & Taieb Znati, “Wireless Sensor Networks‐
Technology, Protocols, and Applications”, John Wiley, 2007.
5. Anna Hac, “Wireless Sensor Network Designs”, John Wiley, 2003.

COURSE TITLE DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4369 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to explain the concepts of message,circuit,manual,2‐D switching 1, 2, 3
2. Able to explain/Describe the concepts of different stages. 1, 2, 3,12
3. Able to explain/Describe the need for network synchronization. 1, 2 , 3,12
Able to explain/Describe the concepts of statistical modeling of telephone 1, 2, 3, 5,
4.
traffic, blocking system characteristics and queuing system characteristics. 12
5. Able to explain/Describe the concepts of cellular telecommunication 1,3, 6, 8,12
Prerequisites: NIL
MODULE 1 – DEVELOPMENT OF TELECOMMUNICATION SWITCHING SYSTEMS (9L)
Message switching, Circuit switching, Manual switching, and Electronic Switching. Digital switching:
Switching functions, space division switching, time division switching, two dimensional switching,
digital cross connect systems, digital switching in an analog environment, Next Generation Network‐
Standards, Concepts, Architecture and Protocol, Residential or small business access technologies –
Digital Subscriber Line (DSL)
MODULE 2 – SWITCHING NETWORKS (9L)
Single Stage Networks, Passive Optical Networks (PON), Cable MODEMS, Grading: Principle, Design of
progressive grading, other grading, Traffic capacity of grading, Applications of grading. Link Systems:
General, Two stage networks, three stage networks, four stage networks. Grades of service of link
systems: General, Two stage networks, three stage networks, four stage networks Call packing,
SS.7,CDOT[Indigenous] /EWSD/5ESS switch
MODULE 3 – NETWORK SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL AND MANAGEMENT (9L)
Timing: Timing Recovery: Phase‐Locked Loop, Clock Instability, Jitter Measurements, Systematic Jitter.
Timing Inaccuracies: Slips, Asynchronous Multiplexing, Network Synchronization, U.S. Network
Synchronization, Network Control, Network Management.

151
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 4 – TRAFFIC ANALYSIS (9L)

Traffic Characterization: Arrival Distributions, Holding Time Distributions, Loss Systems, Network
Blocking Probabilities: End‐to‐End Blocking Probabilities, Overflow Traffic, Delay Systems: Exponential
service Times, Constant Service Times, Finite Queues.
MODULE 5 – CELLULAR TELEPHONE CONCEPTS (9L)
Mobile telephone services, cellular telephone, Frequency reuse, Interference, Cellular system
topology, Roaming and handoffs, Cellular telephone network components, Cellular telephone call
processing. Cellular Telephone systems: Digital cellular telephone, IS–95. GSM GPRS for Mobile
communications, Personal Satellite communication system.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Thiagarajan Vishwanathan, “Telecommunication Switching Systems and Networks”; PHI
Publications, 2006.
2. J. E. Flood , “Telecommunications Switching, Traffic and Networks”, Pearson Education,
2001.
3. John C. Bellamy, “Digital Telephony”, Third Edition; Wiley Publications, 2000.
4. Wayne Tomasi, “Electronic Communications Systems”; 5th Edition; Pearson Education,
2014.
E BOOKS
1 https://books.google.co.in › Technology & Engineering › Electronics › General
2 https://www.scribd.com/doc/244713446/Telecommunication‐Switching‐Systems‐And‐
Networks‐pdf
3 https://books.google.co.in/books/about/TELECOMMUNICATION_SWITCHING_SYSTEMS_
MOOC
1 nptel.ac.in/courses/106105080/pdf/M4L1.pdf
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/Webcourse‐
contents/IIT%20Kharagpur/Communication%20network/New_index1.html

152
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE SPEECH SIGNAL PROCESSING CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4370 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
The basic characteristics of speech signal and hearing perception will be
1. studied. 1,2,3

2. The fundamental concepts of digital signal processing will be known 1,2,3,4

3. To understand the fundamentals of Human speech production and perception 1,2,3
To be familiarize with the basic concepts of homomorphic speech processing
4. 1,2,3
and linear prediction
5. To know about the basic applications like speech recognition, synthesis, coding. 4,5,6
Prerequisites: Basics on signal processing techniques
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO DIGITAL SPEECH PROCESSING (9L)
Fundamentals of Human Speech Production, Acoustic Properties of American English Speech,
Fundamentals of Speech Perception, Computational Models of Speech Perception, Time‐Domain
Methods for Speech Processing
Suggested reading‐ Basics on human speech processing
MODULE 2 – FUNDAMENTALS OF DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (9L)
Review of Discrete‐Time Signals and Systems, Review of Transform Representation of Signals and
Systems (DFT, STFT), Fundamentals of Digital Filters, Review of Sampling Theory.
Suggested reading‐ Signal processing techniques
MODULE 3 – HUMAN SPEECH PRODUCTION & PERCEPTION (9L)
The Process of Speech Production, Short‐Time Fourier Representation of Speech, The Acoustic Theory
of Speech Production, Digital model of speech production, Anatomy and Function of the Ear, The
Perception of Sound; Masking; Pitch, Measurement of Speech Quality and Intelligibility. ‐
psychoacoustics
Suggested reading‐ Digital modelling of speech signals
MODULE 4 – HOMOMORPHIC SPEECH PROCESSING & LINEAR PREDICTION (9L)
Homomorphic Systems for Convolution, Homomorphic Analysis of the Speech Model, Computing the
Short‐Time Cepstrum and Complex Cepstrum of Speech, Homomorphic Filtering of Natural Speech,
Cepstrum Analysis of All‐Pole Models, Linear Predictive Analysis of Speech Signals, Computation of the
Gain for the Model.
Suggested reading‐ Cepstrum, Linear prediction of speech signals

153
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 5 – SPEECH RECOGNITION & SPEECH SYNTHESIS (9L)

Feature extraction – MFCC, LPCC ‐ Automatic Speech Recognition and Natural Language
Understanding, Building a Speech Recognition System. Speech synthesis – Articulatory synthesizer,
Concatenative synthesis –USS – Statistical parametric speech synthesis ‐ DNN‐based speech synthesis
Suggested reading ‐ ASR & synthesis techniques
TEXT BOOKS
1. Rabiner, L., Juang, Biing‐Hwang and Yegnanarayana, B, ‘Fundamentals of Speech Recognition’,
Pearson, India, 2011.
2. Rabiner, L. R. and Schafer, R. W.,‘Theory and Applications of Digital Speech Processing’, Pearson,
2011.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Ben Gold, Nelson Morgan, Dan Ellis, Speech and Audio Signal Processing: Processing and
Perception of Speech and Music, John Wiley & Sons, Nov. 2011
2 Thomas F. Quatieri, “Discrete‐time speech signal processing: Principles and practice”, Prentice
Hall, 2002.
3 Douglas O'Shaughnessy, "Speech Communications: Human and Machine", second edition,
Universities Press, 2009.
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc17_ec13
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/117101055/cdeep%20demo%20ppt/processing.html

COURSE TITLE RADAR SYSTEMS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4371 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-4
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to understand radar fundamentals and analysis of the radar signals. 1,2,5,6
Able to understand various radars like MT1. Doppler and tracking radars and
2. their comparison. 1,2,4,5,6

Able to understand the different types of RADARS and applications based on the
3. 1,2,3,4,5,6
type of Transmitters and their functions.
4. Able to understand various detection of noise, display types and receivers. 1,2,5,6
5. Able to understand the propagation of Radar waves 1,2,3,4,5,6
Prerequisites: Antennas and wave propagation; Electromagnetics and Communications

MODULE 1 – AN INTRODUCTION TO RADAR & THE RADAR EQUATION (9L)

Basic Radar‐The simple form of Radar Equation‐Radar Block Diagram‐Radar Frequencies
Application of Radar‐The origins of Radar. Introduction of the Radar Equation – Detection of Signals
in Noise – Receiver Noise and the Signal to Noise Ratio‐ Probability Density Functions‐ Probabilities of
Detection and False Alarm – Integration of Radar Pulses – Radar Cross Section of Targets – Radar
Cross Section Fluctuations‐ Transmitter Power – Pulse Repletion Frequency‐Antenna Parameters –
System Losses
Suggested Reading: Other Radar Equation Considerations

154
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 2 – MTI AND PULSE DOPPLER RADAR & TRACKING RADAR (9L)
Introduction to Doppler & MTI Radar‐ Delay Line Cancelers‐ Staggered Pulse Repetition Frequencies
Doppler Filter Banks – Digital MTI Processing –Moving Target Detector‐ Limitations to MTI
Performance‐ MTI from a Moving Platform(AMTI) – Pulse Doppler Radar‐ Other Doppler Radar
Topics. Tracking with Radar‐Monopulse Tracking – Conical Scan and Sequential Lobbing‐
Limitations to Tracking Accuracy‐ Low‐Angle Tracking‐ Tracking in Range‐ Other Tracking Radar
Topics Comparison of Trackers
Suggested Reading: Automatic Tracking with Surveillance Radars (ADT)
MODULE 3 – THE RADAR ANTENNA & RADAR TRANSMITTERS (9L)
Functions of the Radar Antenna – Antenna Parameters – Antenna Radiation Pattern and
Aperture Illumination – Reflector Antennas – Electronically Steered Phased Array Antennas – Phase
Shifters –Frequency Scan Arrays – Radiators for Phased Arrays – Architectures for Phased Arrays
–Mechanically Steered Planar Array Antennas. Introduction to Radar Transmitters – Linear – Beam
Power Tubes – Solid State RF Power Sources –Magnetron – Crossed Field Amplifiers
Suggested Reading: Other RF Power Sources.
MODULE 4 – RADAR RECEIVERS (9L)
Noise Figure and Noise Temperature. Displays – types. Duplexer – Branch type and Balanced type,
Circulators as Duplexers. Introduction to Phased Array Antennas‐ Basic Concepts, Radiation Pattern.
Beam Steering and Beam Width changes, Series versus Parallel Feeds.
Suggested Reading: Applications, Advantages and Limitations.
MODULE 5 – PROPAGATION AND DETECTION OF RADAR SIGNALS (9L)
Introduction to Propagation of Radar Waves – Forward Scattering from a Flat Earth – Scattering
from the Round Earth‘s Surface – Atmospheric Refraction – Standard Propagation – Nonstandard
Propagation – Diffraction. Introduction, Matched Filter Receiver – Response Characteristics and
Derivation, Correlation Function and Cross‐correlation Receiver,
Suggested Reading: Efficiency of Non‐matched Filters, Matched Filter with Non‐white Noise.
TEXT BOOKS
1. Introduction to Radar Systems, MERILL I SKOLNIK – Tata McGraw Hill – 3rd edition 2001

2. Introduction to Radar System, K.K. Sharma ‐ S K Kataria & Sons – 2015 Edition ‐ 2012
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Radar Hand Book‐ MERILL I SKOLNIK‐ Tata McGraw Hill,2001
2 Radar Principals, Technology, Applications – Byron Edde, Pearson Education, 2004.
3 Radar Principles – Peebles, Jr., P.Z.Wiley, NweYork, 1998.
E BOOKS
1. http://www.radartutorial.eu/druck/Book1.pdf
2. https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res‐ll‐001‐introduction‐to‐radar‐systems‐spring‐2007/
MOOC
1 https://ocw.mit.edu/resources/res‐ll‐001‐introduction‐to‐radar‐systems‐spring‐2007/
2 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/101108056/
3 http://lej4learning.com.pk/videos‐introduction‐to‐radar‐systems‐mit/

155
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE SATELLITE COMMUNICATION CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4372 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Understand the basics of satellite systems in relation to other terrestrial systems. 1,2,3
2. Understand the concepts of Geostationary Orbit and Space Segment 1,2,3
3. Understand the concepts of earth segment and space links 1,2,3
4. Understand the different access system towards a satellite 1,2,3
5. Understand the Direct Broadcast Satellite Services 1,2,3
Prerequisites:
Basic concepts of Analog and Digital Communication
MODULE 1 – BASICS OF SATELLITE SYSTEMS AND ORBITS (9L)
Introduction – Frequency Allocations for Satellite Services – Intelsat – U.S. Domsats – Polar Orbiting
Satellites – Kepler’s Laws –Definitions of Terms for Earth‐orbiting Satellites – Orbital Elements – Apogee
and Perigee Heights – Orbital Perturbations – Effects of a Nonspherical Earth – Atmospheric Drag –
Inclined Orbits –Calendars – Universal Time – Julian Dates – Sidereal Time – The Orbital Plane – The
Geocentric‐ Equatorial Coordinate System – Earth Station Referred to the IJK Frame – The Topcentric‐
Horizon Co‐ordinate System – The Sub‐satellite Point – Predicting Satellite Position.
MODULE 2 – GEOSTATIONARY ORBIT AND SPACE SEGMENT (9L)
Antenna Look Angels – The Polar Mount Antenna – Limits of Visibility – Near Geostationary Orbits –
Earth Eclipse of Satellite – Sun Transit Outage – Launching Orbits – Problems – Power Supply – Attitude
Control – Station Keeping – Thermal Control – TT&C Subsystem – Transponders – Antenna Subsystem
– Morelos – Anik‐E – Advanced Tiros‐N Spacecraft
MODULE 3 – EARTH SEGMENT & SPACE LINK (9L)
Introduction – Receive‐Only Home TV Systems –– Master Antenna TV System – Community Antenna
TV System – Transmit‐Receive Earth Stations – Problems – Equivalent Isotropic Radiated Power –
Transmission Losses –Link Power Budget Equation – System Noise –Carrier‐to‐Noise Ratio – Uplink –
Downlink – Effects of Rain –– Combined Uplink and Downlink C/N Ratio – Intermodulation Noise.
MODULE 4 – SATELLITE ACCESS (9L)
Single Access – Preassigned FDMA, Demand‐Assigned FDMA, SPADE System,TDMA , On‐board signal
Processing for TDMA / FDMA operation, Satellite switched TDMA, Code‐Division Multiple Access –
Problems .
MODULE 5 – DIRECT BROADCAST SATELLITE SERVICES (9L)
Introduction – Orbital Spacing – Power Rating and Number of Transponders – Frequencies and
Polarization – Transponder Capacity – Bit Rates for Digital Television – MPEG Compression Standards
– Forward Error Correction – Home Receiver Outdoor Unit (ODU) – Home Receiver Indoor Unit (IDU) –
Downlink Analysis – Uplink ‐ Satellite Mobile Services – VSATs – Radarsat – Global Positioning Satellite
System – Orbcomm.

156
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communications, McGraw‐Hill Publication Fourth edition 2006
2. Timothy Pratt – Charles Bostian & Jeremy Allmuti, Satellite Communications, John Willy &
Sons (Asia) Pvt. Ltd. 2004
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Wilbur L. Pritchars Henri G.Suyder Hond Robert A.Nelson, Satellite Communication Systems
Engineering, Pearson Education Ltd., Second edition 2003.
2 M.Richharia : Satellite Communication Systems (Design Principles Macmillan Press Ltd.
Second Edition 2003.
E BOOKS
1 http://www.freebookcentre.net/electronics_communication_books/satellite_communicati
on_systems_ebooks.htm
2 Text book companionhttp://www.scilab.in/Completed_Books#2
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/syllabus/syllabus_pdf/117105131.pdf/38
2 http://ggn.dronacharya.info/ECEDept/Downloads/QuestionBank/VIIsem/NPTEL_LINKS_SAT
ELLITE_COMM.pdf

157
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

DEPARTMENT ELECTIVES
SEMESTER VII

COURSE TITLE WIRELESS NETWORKS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4451 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL - 3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Ability to understand the strengths and limitations of mobile/wireless networks 1,6,10,12
Ability to design and analyze the performance of location update algorithms for
2. cellular networks. 1,3,4,5,6

3. Ability to understand the IP Network layer 1,6,7,10,12

4. Ability to understand Database concepts 1,6,7,10,12
5. Ability to understand MANET’s concepts 1,6,7,10,12
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION TO NETWORK TECHNOLOGIES AND CELLULAR COMMUNICATIONS
HIPERLAN (9L)
Protocol Architecture, Physical Layer, Channel Access Control Sub‐layer, MAC Sub‐layer, Information
Bases and Networking.
WLAN: Infrared vs Radio Transmission, Infrastructure and Ad Hoc Networks, IEEE 802.11.
GSM: Mobile Services, System Architecture, Radio Interface, Protocols, Localization and calling,
Handover, Security, and New Data Services.
MODULE 2 - (WIRELESS) MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) (9L)
Motivation for a Specialized MAC (Hidden and Exposed Terminals, Near and Far Terminals), SDMA,
FDMA, TDMA, CDMA. MAC Protocols for GSM, Wireless LAN (IEEE8O2.11), Collision Avoidance (MACA,
MACAW) Protocols.
MODULE 3 - MOBILE IP NETWORK LAYER (9L)
lP and Mobile IP Network Layers, Packet Delivery and Handover Management, Location Management,
Registration, Tunnelling and Encapsulation, Route Optimization, DHCP. Mobile Transport Layer:
Conventional TCP/IP Protocols, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Other Transport Layer Protocols
for Mobile Networks.
MODULE 4 – DATABASE ISSUES (9L)
Database Hoarding & Caching Techniques, Client—Server Computing & Adaptation, Transactional
Models, Query processing, Data Recovery Process & QoS Dissemination and Synchronization.
Communications Asymmetry, Classification of Data Delivery Mechanisms, Data Dissemination Broadcast
Models, Selective Tuning and Indexing Methods, Digital Audio and Video Broadcasting (DAB & DVB).

MODULE 5 - MOBILE AD HOC NETWORKS (MANETs) (9L)

Introduction, Applications & Challenges of a MANET, Routing, Classification of Routing Algorithms,
Algorithms such as DSR, AODV, DSDV, etc. , Mobile Agents, Service Discovery.

158
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1. Raj Kamal, “Mobile Computing”, Oxford University Press, 2007, ISBN: 0195686772

2. Jochen Schiller, “Mobile Communications”, Addison‐Wesley, Second Edition, 2004

REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Stojmenovic and Cacute, “Handbook of Wireless Networks and Mobile Computing”, Wiley,
2002, ISBN 0471419028.
2 Reza Behravanfar, “Mobile Computing Principles: Designing and Developing Mobile
Applications with UML and XML”, ISBN: 0521817331, Cambridge University Press, Oct 2004,

COURSE TITLE SOFTWARE DEFINED RADIO CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4452 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-5
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Understand the Introduction of Software Defined Radio and its future 1
2. To understand the different types of SDR Architecture 1,2,3
understand the Front End technology like Transmitter and receiver designing & its
3. 2,3,4
specifications
To understand Baseband Processing and Reconfiguration of antenna, Network
4. 2,3,4,6
elements‐
5. Understand the GNU radio platform 2,3,12
Prerequisites:
MODULE 1 – SDR INTRODUCTION (9L)
Software Radio aspects, The Need for Software Radios, Characteristics and Benefits of a Software Radio,
Design Principles of a Software Radio. SDR concepts & history, Benefits of SDR, SDR Forum, Ideal SDR
architecture, SDR Based End to‐ End Communication, Worldwide frequency band plans‐ Future of
Software Defined Radio‐ Introduction to Cognitive Radio.
MODULE 2 – ARCHITECTURE (9L)
Introduction – 2G Radio Architectures Hybrid Radio Architecture‐ Basic Software Defined Radio Block
Diagram‐ System Level Functioning Partitioning‐Digital Frequency Conversion Partitioning., Functional
View, Networking Overview‐Core Framework‐ Operating Environment (OE)‐ SCA architecture,
specification structure‐ General requirements and services, devices and Certification
MODULE 3 – FRONT END TECHNOLOGY (9L)
Radio Frequency translation, Transmitter specifications, Architecture, Design considerations‐ Receiver
specifications, Architecture, considerations‐ Front end Implementation‐Data conversions‐Zero IF
receivers, Preselect Filters.

159
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 4 – BASEBAND PROCESSING AND RECONFIGURATION (9L)

Base band component technologies, Design tools, Methodologies‐ Antenna requirements‐
Reconfiguration of network elements‐ user requirement of SDR terminals‐ Reconfiguration strategies,
requirements and management techniques.
MODULE 5 – GNU RADIO PLATFORM (9L)
Software Radio platforms: Low Cost SDR Platform‐ GNU radio‐ Python introduction, developing GNU
Radio, signal processing blocks, scheduler, Basic GR development flow, Universal Software radio
peripherals (USRP).
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. Bard, Kovarik: Software Defined Radio, The Software Communications Architecture, Wiley
2007, 3rd Edition.
2. Dillinger, Madani, Alonistioti (Eds.): Software Defined Radio, Architectures, Systems and
Functions, Wiley 2003
3. Dr. Walter Tuttlebee: Software Defined Radio‐Enabling Technologies, Wiley 2002
4. Tafazolli (Ed.): Technologies for the Wireless Future, Wiley 2005
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Eugene Grayver, Implementing Software Defined Radio, Springer, 2013.
2 Cory Clark, Software Defined Radio: With GNU Radio and USRP, McGraw‐Hill
Companies, Incorporated, 29‐Nov‐2008
E BOOKS
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Software-defined_radio
2 http://www.scielo.org.co/pdf/rfing/v24n38/v24n38a07.pdf
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc18_ec01/preview
2 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/

160
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE HIGH SPEED NETWORKS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4453 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Able to study and understand the basics of ATM and Frame relay. 1,5,6
Able to get familiarize with the up‐to‐date developments in High Speed 1,3,5,6,7
2.
Networks and know the effects of congestion and Traffic management.
Able to understand the techniques involved to support real‐time traffic and 1,3,4,5,6
3.
congestion control in TCP and ATM networks
Able to understand the Integrated and differentiated services along with the 1,3,4,5,6
4.
queuing disciplines.
Able to understand the different levels of quality of service (QoS) in different 1,3,4,5,6,7,
5.
applications. 12
Prerequisites: Computer Networks
MODULE 1 – HIGH SPEED NETWORKS (9L)
Frame Relay Networks – Asynchronous transfer mode – ATM Protocol Architecture, ATM logical
Connection, ATM Cell – ATM Service Categories – AAL. High Speed LANs: Fast Ethernet, Gigabit
Ethernet, Fiber Channel – Wireless LANs: applications, requirements – Architecture of 802.11.
Suggested Reading: IEEE Standards and Specifications.
MODULE 2 – CONGESTION AND TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT (9L)
Queuing Analysis‐ Queuing Models – Single Server Queues – Effects of Congestion –Congestion
Control – Traffic Management – Congestion Control in Packet Switching Networks– Frame Relay
Congestion Control.
Suggested Reading: Queuing Theory Applications.
MODULE 3 – TCP AND ATM CONGESTION CONTROL (9L)
TCP Flow control – TCP Congestion Control – Retransmission – Timer Management –Exponential RTO
backoff – KARN’s Algorithm – Window management – Performance of TCP over ATM. Traffic and
Congestion control in ATM – Requirements – Attributes – Traffic Management Frame work, Traffic
Control – ABR traffic Management – ABR rate control, RM cell formats, ABR Capacity allocations – GFR
traffic management.
Suggested Reading: Internet Traffic Management.
MODULE 4 – INTEGRATED AND DIFFERENTIATED SERVICES (9L)
Integrated Services Architecture – Approach, Components, Services‐ Queuing Discipline, FQ,PS, BRFQ,
GPS, WFQ – Random Early Detection, Differentiated Services
Suggested Reading: Applications of different architectures.
MODULE 5 – PROTOCOLS FOR QoS SUPPORT (9L)
RSVP – Goals & Characteristics, Data Flow, RSVP operations, Protocol Mechanisms –Multiprotocol
Label Switching – Operations, Label Stacking, Protocol details – RTP – Protocol Architecture, Data
Transfer Protocol, RTCP.
Suggested Reading: Network Routing Protocol.

161
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK

NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. William Stallings, “High Speed Networks and Internet”, Pearson Education, Second Edition,
2014.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 Warland and Pravin Varaiya, “High Performance Communication Networks”, Jean Harcourt
Asia Pvt. Ltd., II Edition, 2001.
2 Irvan Pepelnjk, Jim Guichard and Jeff Apcar, “MPLS and VPN architecture”, Cisco
Press,Volume 1 and 2, 2003.
MOOC
1 http://nptel.ac.in/courses/106105082/30
2 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐263j‐data‐
communication‐networks‐fall‐2002/
3 https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/electrical‐engineering‐and‐computer‐science/6‐976‐high‐
speed‐communication‐circuits‐and‐systems‐spring‐2003/

COURSE TITLE REMOTE SENSING CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4454 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1 Understand the principles of remote sensing techniques and spectral responses 1,6,10
2 Know optical and microwave remote sensing 1,6,10,12
3 Know the principles behind thermal remote sensing. 1,6,7,12
To Interpret Satellite Images.
4 1,6,7,12
Understand the theory behind GIS.
5 Understand the theory behind GIS. 1,6,12
Prerequisites: Basic Physics
MODULE 1:- INTRODUCTION TO REMOTE SENSING (9L)
Definition – Components of Remote Sensing – Energy, Sensor, Interacting Body ‐ Active and Passive
Remote Sensing – Platforms – Aerial and Space Platforms – Balloons, Helicopters, Aircraft and Satellites
– Synoptivity and Repetivity – Electro Magnetic Radiation (EMR) – EMR spectrum – Visible, InfraRed
(IR), Near IR, Middle IR, Thermal IR and Microwave – Black Body Radiation ‐ Planck‘s law – Stefan‐
Boltzman law

162
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 2:- MICROWAVE AND OPTICAL REMOTE SENSING (9L)

Optical Remote Sensing: Satellites ‐ Classification – Based on Orbits and Purpose – Satellite Sensors ‐
Resolution – Description of Multi Spectral Scanning – Along and Across Track Scanners – Description of
Sensors in Landsat, SPOT, IRS series – Current Satellites
Microwave Remote Sensing: The RADAR principle‐Radar Wavebands‐Side Looking Airborne Radar
(SLAR) systems‐Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR)‐Interaction Between Microwaves and Earth's Surface‐
Speckle Noise, Backscattered Radar Intensity‐Interpreting SAR Images‐Geometrical Characteristics‐
Slope Foreshortening, Layover, Aspect, Radar Shadow.
MODULE 3:- THERMAL REMOTE SENSING (9L)
Introduction‐Principles of Thermal Remote Sensing‐The physical laws, Black bodies and emissivity,
Radiant and kinetic temperatures‐Processing Thermal Data‐Band Ratios and Transformations,
Determining Kinetic Surface temperatures‐Thermal Applications‐Rock Emissivity Mapping, Thermal
hotspot Detection.
MODULE 4:- IMAGE INTERPRETATION (9L)
Introduction‐ Image interpretation strategy‐Levels of Interpretation Keys‐Process of Image
Interpretation‐Interpretation of Aerial Photo‐General procedure for photo interpretation‐Preliminary
Stage, Detailed Examination, Interpretation Stage, Compilation Stage‐Three dimensional
interpretation Method‐Stereoscopic Depth Perception, Stereo Scope‐Basic elements of Image
Interpretation‐Application of Aerial Photo Interpretation‐Interpretation of Satellite Imagery‐Key
Elements of Visual Image Interpretation‐Visual Interpretation of Topographic Features Based on
Reflection Characteristics of Images.
MODULE 5:- GIS AND APPLICATIONS OF REMOTE SENSING (9L)
GIS – Components of GIS – Hardware, Software and Organizational Context – Data – Spatial and Non‐
Spatial – Maps – Types of Maps – Projection – Types of Projection ‐ Data Input – Digitizer, Scanner –
Editing – Raster and Vector data structures – Comparison of Raster and Vector data structure – Analysis
using Raster and Vector data – Retrieval, Reclassification, Overlaying, Buffering – Data Output –
Printers and Plotters‐ Integration of GIS and Remote Sensing – Application of Remote Sensing and GIS
– Water resources – Urban Analysis – Watershed Management – Resources Information Systems.
TEXT BOOKS
M.G. Srinivas (Edited by), Remote Sensing Applications, Narosa Publishing House, 2001. (Units
1
1).
Anji Reddy, Remote Sensing and Geographical Information Systems, BS Publications 2001 (Units
2
2,4 and 5).
W.H.Baker, Principles of remote sensing : an introductory textbook, Published by:The
3
International Institute for Geo‐Information Science and Earth Observation (ITC),2009.(Unit‐3)
REFERENCES
1 Jensen, J.R., Remote sensing of the environment, Prentice Hall, 2000.
2 Kang‐Tsung Chang,‖ Introduction to Geographic Information Systems‖, TMH, 2002

163
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

Lillesand T.M. and Kiefer R.W., ―Remote Sensing and Image Interpreta on‖, John Wiley and
3
Sons, Inc, New York, 1987.
Janza.F.J., Blue, H.M., and Johnston, J.E., "Manual of Remote Sensing Vol. I., American Society
4
of Photogrammetry, Virginia, U.S.A, 1975.
5 Burrough P A, ―Principle of GIS for land resource assessment‖, Oxford, 2008.
Mischael Hord, "Remote Sensing Methods and Applications", John Wiley & Sons, New York,
6
1986.
7 Singal, "Remote Sening", Tata McGraw‐Hill, New Delhi, 1990.
Floyd F. Sabins, Remote sensing, ―Principles and interpreta on‖, W H Freeman and Company
8
1996.
EBOOK
https://www.researchgate.net/publication/233793637_Principles_of_remote_sensing_an_intr
1 oductory_textbook

2 https://www.gisresources.com/wp‐content/uploads/2013/09/anji‐reddy_GIS.pdf

COURSE TITLE OPTO ELECTRONIC DEVICES CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4455 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-6
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
Understand the wave nature of light, and the quantum mechanical treatment of
1. 1,6,12
light
Know Electro Luminescence, Injection Luminescence, Investigate Laser Emission,
2. Absorption, Radiation, Population Inversion, Optical Feedback and threshold 1,6,7,12
condition
Analyze mechanism of operation of Photo detector, Thermal detector, Photo
3. 1,3,6,7,12
Devices, Photo Conductors, Photo diodes and study their performance
Know Analog and Digital Modulation, Electro‐optic modulators and solve
4. 1,3,6,12
problems related to Optical Switching and Logic Devices
Understand Optical Integrated Circuits (OIC), Integrated transmitters and
5. 1,3,6,7,12
receivers
Prerequisites: Electronic Devices, Optical Communication
MODULE 1 – I ELEMENTS OF LIGHT AND SOLID STATE PHYSICS (9L)
Wave nature of light, Polarization, Interference, Diffraction, Light Source, review of Quantum
Mechanical concept, Review of Solid State Physics, Review of Semiconductor Physics and Semiconductor
Junction Device

164
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

MODULE 2 – DISPLAY DEVICES AND LASERS (9L)

Introduction, Photo Luminescence, Cathode Luminescence, Electro Luminescence, Injection
Luminescence, LED, Plasma Display, Liquid Crystal Displays, Numeric Displays, Laser Emission,
Absorption, Radiation, Population Inversion, Optical Feedback, Threshold condition, Laser Modes,
Classes of Lasers, Mode Locking, laser applications
MODULE 3 – OPTICAL DETECTION DEVICES (9L)
Photo detector, Thermal detector, Photo Devices, Photo Conductors, Photo diodes, Detector
Performance
MODULE 4 – OPTOELECTRONIC MODULATOR (9L)
Introduction, Analog and Digital Modulation, Electro‐optic modulators, Magneto Optic Devices,
Acousto‐Optic devices, Optical, Switching and Logic Devices.
MODULE 5 – OPTOELECTRONIC INTEGRATED CIRCUITS (9L)
Introduction, hybrid and Monolithic Integration, Application of Opto Electronic Integrated Circuits,
Integrated transmitters and Receivers, Guided wave devices
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NA
TEXT BOOKS
1. J Wilson and JFB Hawkes, Optoelectronics – an Intro duction, PHI, 3/e, 2010
2. Pallab Bhattacharya, Semiconductor Optoelectronic Devices, PHI, 2/e, 2009
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 John M Senior, Optical Fiber Communication – principle and practices, PHI, 3/e, 2010
2 Djafar K Manbaev, Fiber‐Optic Communication technology, Pearson Education, 6th
Reprint, 2012
MOOC
1 https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc16_mm01/announcements

165
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4456 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Basic electronic components used in industry will be known 1,2,3,4,6
2. Characteristics and working of thyristors will be studied 1,2,3,6,12
3. Understood the principle and working of rectifiers 1,6,10,12
4. Concepts of Ac voltage controllers is known 1,3,6,12
5. Understood the principle and working of Choppers and invertors 1,2,4,6
MODULE 1 – INTRODUCTION (9L)
Applications of power electronics, Power semiconductor devices, Control characteristics, Types of
power electronics circuits, Peripheral effects. Power Transistors: Power BJT’s, switching
characteristics, switching limits, Power MOSFET’s, Switching characteristics, IGBT’s.
MODULE 2 – INTRODUCTION TO THYRISTORS (9L)
Principle of operation, anode‐cathode characteristics, Two transistor model. Turn‐on Methods,
Dynamic Turn‐on and turn‐off characteristics, Gate characteristics, Gate trigger circuits, di / dt and dv
/ dt protection, Thyristor firing circuits. UJT characteristics, applications.
MODULE 3 – CONTROLLED RECTIFIERS (9L)
Introduction, Principles of phase controlled converter operation, 1φ fully controlled converters, Duel
converters, 1 φ semi converters (all converters with R & RL load). Thyristor turn off methods. Natural
and forced commutation, self‐commutation, class A and class B types.
MODULE 4 – AC VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS (9L)
Introduction, Principles of on and off control, Principles of phase control, Single phase controllers with
restive loads and Inductive loads, numerical problems.
MODULE 5 – DC CHOPPERS (9L)
Introduction, Principles of step down and step up choppers, Step down chopper with RL loads,
Chopper classification, Switch mode regulators – buck, boost and buck – boost regulators.
Invertors: Introduction, Principles of operation, Performance parameters. Solar Heating Systems,
Microwave Oven.
RECOMMENDED BOOKS
1 M. H. Rashid “Power Electronics” ‐ 3rd edition, PHI / Pearson publisher 2004.
2 M. D. Singh and Kanchandani K.B. “Power Electronics” ‐ TMH publisher, 2nd Ed. 2007.
3 L Umanand, “Power Electronics, Essentials and Applications”, John Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2009.
4 Daniel W. Hart “Power Electronics”, McGraw Hill, 2010.
5 V Natarasu and R.S. Anandamurhty, “Power Electronics ”, V Natarasu and RS
anandamurhty, Pearson/Sanguine Pub. 2006

166
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

COURSE TITLE ADVANCED MOBILE COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY CREDITS 3

COURSE CODE ECC4457 COURSE CATEGORY DE L-T-P-S 3-0-0-1
CIA 50% ESE 50%
LEARNING LEVEL BTL-3
CO COURSE OUTCOMES PO
1. Understand the basics of OFDM and MIMO 1,3,6,10,12
Understand the role of key Wireless standards and their enhancement by
2. 1,3,6,12
applying OFDMA &MIMO concepts
3. Understand the need and role of 5G in communication environment 1,3,6,12
4. Application of key resources ( Small cell, Mobile cloud) in 5G communication 1,4,6,12
5. Analyze the role of 5G in Millimeter wave communication 1,4,6,12
Prerequisites:
MODULE 1 – AN INTRODUCTION TO OFDM AND MIMO (9L)
Multi‐Carrier Modulation – Orthogonal Frequency‐Division Multiplexing, OFDM Related Issues, OFDM
Transceiver Architecture – Multiple‐Input Multiple‐Output (MIMO) Basics, MIMO Techniques, MIMO‐
OFDM System Example
Suggested reading‐ Beamforming concepts
MODULE 2 – KEY WIRELESS STANDARDS (9L)
3G and 4G Wireless Standards‐GSM, WCDMA, LTE, LTE advanced, UWB and WiMAX. Application of
OFDM and MIMIO in LTE, UWB & LTE advanced
Suggested reading‐ Smart antennas
MODULE 3 – 5G ROADMAP AND SPECTRUM (9L)
Drivers for 5G – Introduction Evolution of LTE Technology to Beyond 4G.THE 5G Roadmap and Pillars
– Architecture of 5G INTERNET – Internet of Things and context‐Awareness – 5G spectrum –challenges
–Spectrum and Bandwidth requirements
Suggested reading‐ Current trends of 5G Implementation in Europe, North America and Asia
MODULE 4 – KEY ENABLING RESOURCES FOR 5G (9L)
Small Cells for 5G mobile networks‐ Introduction – Small Cells – Capacity limits and Achievable gains
with densification – Mobile data demand – Introduction to mobile cloud– Resources– Enablers
Suggested reading‐ Mobility challenges in 5G
MODULE 5– ARCHITECTURE& APPLICATION OF 5G IN MMW COMMUNICATION (9L)
5G ARCHITECTURE – Introduction – High level requirements for 5G architecture – Functional
architecture and 5G flexibility – Physical Architecture and 5G deployment. Millimeter wave
communication – spectrum and regulations – channel propagation – Hardware technologies for mmW
systems –Architecture and mobility –Beam‐forming concepts
Suggested reading‐ SON network architecture over LTE and its role in 5G
LAB / MINI PROJECT/FIELD WORK
NIL

167
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABUS B.TECH – ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

TEXT BOOKS
1. Fundamentals of 5G mobile Networks, Edited by Jonathan RodisQuez, John Wiley
publication, 2015
2. 5G Mobile and Wireless Communications Technology, Edited by Asif Osseiran, Jose F.
Monserrat, Patrick Marsch: Cambridge university press, June 2016.
3. Martin Sauter, "From GSM to LTE‐Advanced: An Introduction to Mobile Networks and
Mobile Broadband" John Willey & Sons Ltd., 2014.
4. Lal Chand Godara, “Smart Antennas” CRC press, 2004.
REFERENCE BOOKS
1 William Stallings, “Wireless Communication and Networks”, Pearson Education, 2003.
2 Roy Blake, “Wireless Communication Technology”, India edition, Cengage learning, 2010
3 Jiangzhou Wang, “High‐Speed Wireless Communications: Ultra‐wideband, 3G Long Term
Evolution, and 4G Mobile Systems” Cambridge University Press, 2008
4 Ezio Biglieri and Robert Calderbank “MIMO Wireless Communications”, Cambridge
University Press, 2007.
5 David Tse and Pramod Viswanath, “Fundamentals of Wireless Communication”, Prentice
Hall, 2003.
MOOC
1 https://www.coursera.org/learn/wireless‐communication‐technologies

2 https://academy.5g‐courses.com/courses/towards‐5g‐online‐course
3 https://www.class‐central.com/course/nptel‐millimeter‐wave‐technology‐7903

168